User ’s Manual
China EM Technology Limited
Add ress:
No. 80, Bao min 2 roa d, Xix iang , Bao' an Dis tric t,Sh enzh en ,Ch ina
Pho ne:
86- 0755- 29985 851
Fax :
86- 0755- 29970 305
Zip c ode:
518 101
Webs ite :
Htt p://w ww.emh eat er.com
China EM Technology Limited
E M H E A T E R
EM11 Seri es In ver ter Us er’s Manual
EM11 Series Frequency Inverter
EM11 User’s Manual Preface
I
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the EM11 series frequency inverter developed by China EM Technology
Limited.
The high-performance EM11 series vector control frequency inverter has the following features:
1. Multiple voltage classes
It provides coverage of single-phase 220 V, three-phase 220 V, three-phase 380 V, three-phase 480 V,
three-phase 690 V and three-phase 1140 V.
2. Support multiple motor types
It supports vector control of three-phase AC asynchronous motor and three-phase AC permanent magnet
synchronous motor (PMSM).
3. Diversified control modes
It supports four control modes: sensor-less vector control (SVC), closed- loop vector control (VC) and V/F
control and V/F separately control.
4. Multiple communication protocols
It supports communication via Modbus-RTU, Profibus-DP and CANopen bus.
5. Multiple encoder types
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder, open-collector encoder, resolver and UVW
encoders.
6. Super SVC algorithm
It adopts high-speed response, enhanced low-frequency loading capacity and supports torque control of
SVC, which will bring you a new using experience.
EM11 series frequency inverter is a continuable and vigorous product, and we will offer customized service
to our customers!
Before unpacking, please check carefully:
Whether the nameplate model of frequency inverter are consistent with your order ratings. The box
contains the frequency inverter, user manual.
Whether the frequency inverter is damaged during transportation. If you find any omission or damage,
please contact us or your local supplier immediately.
First-time Use
For the users who use this product for the first time, read the manual carefully. If in doubt concerning some
functions or performances, contact the technical support personnel to ensure correct use.
Due to the continuous improvement of frequency inverter, this document will be updated without prior
notice.
EM11 series Frequency inverter complies with the following international standards. All products have
passed the CE certification.
IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2003 Variable speed electric drive system safety requirements;
IEC/EN61800-3: 2004 Variable speed electric drive system, Part 3: The Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Standards of Product and its specific testing methods.
Note:
There are all parameters list integrated at appendix II.
First time use this inverter, please do motor auto-tuning according to “d0-30”page 104.
Table of Contents EM11 User’s Manual
II
Table of Contents
1. Safety Information and Precautions ............................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Safety Information ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Before installation .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 During installation .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 wiring ............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.4 Before power-on ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.5 After power-on ............................................................................ ................................................... 2
1.1.6 During operation............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.7 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 General Precautions ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Motor insulation test ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Thermal protection of motor .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 Running at over 50 Hz .................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.4 Vibration of mechanical device ...................................................................................................... 4
1.2.5 Motor heat and noise ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter .............................. 4
1.2.7 Contactor at the Input/Output side of the frequency inverter ......................................................... 4
1.2.8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range ............................................................................. 4
1.2.9 Prohibition of three-phase input changed into two-phase input ..................................................... 4
1.2.10 Surge suppressor ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.11 Altitude and de-rating ................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.12 Some special usages ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.13 Disposal ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2.14 Adaptable Motor ........................................................................................................................... 5
2. Product Information .................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Designation Rules ................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2 Nameplate .............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter ........................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.5 Product appearance and installation dimension ................................................................................... 11
2.5.1 Product appearance ....................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension (mm) of EM11 Frequency Inverter ...................... 12
2.5.3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray) ................................... 13
2.6 Options ................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters ........................................................................................... 14
2.7.1 Daily maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.7.2 Regular inspection ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.7.3 Wearing parts replacement ........................................................................................................... 15
2.7.4 Storage of the frequency inverter ................................................................................................. 15
2.8 Warranty Items .................................................................................................................................... 15
2.9 Selection Guide of braking component ............................................................................................... 15
2.9.1 Selection of braking resistance value ........................................................................................... 16
2.9.2 Selection power of braking resistor .............................................................................................. 16
2.9.3 Braking resistor connection description ....................................................................................... 17
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter ............................................................................................................. 18
3.1 Installation environment ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.2 Installation direction and space ........................................................................................................... 18
3.3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram ............................................................................................ 19
3.4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices ................................................................................. 20
3.5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices .......................................................................... 21
3.6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover ......................................................................... 22
3.6.1 Removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad) ................................................................... 22
3.6.2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter ............................................................................ 22
3.7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description ....................................................................................... 23
3.8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals ............................................................................. 24
EM11 User’s Manual Table of Contents
III
3.8.1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals .................................................................... 24
3.9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 25
3.9.1 Power Supply Wiring ................................................................................................................... 25
3.9.2 Motor Wiring .......................................................... ...................................................................... 25
3.9.3 Grounding Wiring ......................................................................................................................... 26
3.9.4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference ...................................................... 26
3.10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description .................................................................. 27
3.10.1 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring ................................................................................... 27
3.10.2 Control Circuit Terminal Layout ................................................................................................ 28
3.10.3 Description of control circuit terminals ...................................................................................... 28
3.10.4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals .................................................................. ............................ 29
3.10.5 Wiring of Multi-functional Input Terminals ............................................................................... 30
3.10.6 Wiring of digital output terminals when using internal and external power supply ............. ...... 30
3.10.7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper ....................................................................................... 31
4. Operation and display .......................................................... ...................................................................... 32
4.1 Instruction of operation and display .................................................................................................... 32
4.2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes ............................................................................................. 33
4.3 Parameter Display Mode ............................................................................................................... ...... 34
4.4 The operation of User-defined Fast Menu of Parameters .............................................................. ...... 35
4.5 Monitoring Status Parameters ............................................................................................................. 36
4.6 Password Setting ................................................................................................................................. 36
4.7 Motor parameter auto-tuning ................................................... ............................................................ 36
5. Description of Function Codes .................................................................................................................. 38
5.1 Group b0: Basic Function Parameters ................................................................................................. 38
5.2 Group b1: Start/Stop Control Parameters ............................................................................................ 46
5.3 Group b2: Auxiliary Functions ...................................................................... ...................................... 49
5.4 Group b3: Input Terminals .................................................................................................................. 54
5.5 Group b4: Output Terminals ................................................................................................................ 60
5.6 Group b5: Pulse/Analog input terminals ............................................................................................. 68
5.7 Group b6: Pulse/analog output terminals ............................................................................................ 71
5.8 Group b7: Virtual digital input (VDI)/digital output (VDO) terminals ........ ....................................... 72
5.9 Group b8: AI/AO Correction ............................................................................................................... 75
5.10 Group b9: Operation Panel and Display ............................................................................................ 76
5.11 Group bA: Communication parameters .................................................................. ........................... 79
5.12 Group bb: Fault and Protection ......................................................................................................... 81
5.13 Group bC: Fault detection Parameters .............................................................................................. 89
5.14 Group C0: Process Control PID Function ......................................................................................... 90
5.15 Group C1:Multi-function .................................................................................................................. 95
5.16 Group C2: Simple PLC ..................................................................................................................... 96
5.17 Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count .................................................................... 99
5.18 Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters ........................................................................................................ 101
5.19 Group d1: Motor 1 vector control parameters ................................................................................. 105
5.20 Group d2: Motor 1 V/F Control Parameters .................................................................................... 110
5.21 Group d3 to d5: Relevant parameters of motor 2 ............................................................................ 114
5.22 Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters ................................................................................... 114
5.23 Group U0: Monitoring Parameters .................................................................................................. 116
5.24 Group A0: System parameters .............................................................................................. ........... 121
5.25 Group A1: User-Defined Function Codes ....................................................................................... 123
6. EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) .................................................................................................... 125
6.1 Definition .......................................................................................................................................... 125
6.2 EMC Standard Description ............................................................................................................... 125
6.3 EMC Guide ....................................................................................................................................... 125
6.3.1 Harmonic Effect ......................................................................................................................... 125
6.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions ........................................................ 125
6.3.3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the inverter ............... 126
6.3.4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding equipment .... 126
6.3.5 Leakage current and handling .................................................................................................... 126
Table of Contents EM11 User’s Manual
IV
6.3.6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply ............. ............... 127
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution .................................................................................................................. 128
7.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures .................................................................................................... 128
7.2 Common Faults and Solutions .......................................................................................................... 132
Appendix I. Modbus communication protocol ........................................................ .................................... 134
I. About Protocol ...................................................................................................................... ............... 134
II. Application Methods ........................................................................................................................... 134
III. Bus structure ...................... ................................................................................................................ 134
Appendix II. Function Code Table .......... .................................................................................................... 143
Warranty Agreement ................................................................................................ .................................... 182
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
1
1. Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
Danger: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even
death.
War nin g: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in personal injury or property
damage.
Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding. Installation, commissioning or
maintenance may be performed in conjunction with this chapter. EMHEATER will assume no liability or
responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Information
1.1.1 Before installation
Danger
Do not use damaged or missing co mponents frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in personal
injury.
Please use the ele ctric motor with upper B insulation class. Failure to comply will result in personal
injury.
1.1.2 During installation
Danger
Install the freq uency inverter on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from
combustible materials. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
War nin g
When two frequency inverters are laid in the sa me cabinet, arrange the installation positions properly to
ensure the enough cooling effect.
Do not drop wire residue or screw into the frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in damage to
the frequency inverter.
1.1.3 wiring
Danger
Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual.
Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents.
A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the frequency inverter. Failure to comply
may result in a fire.
Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
Connect the frequency inverter to ground properly by standard. Failure to co mply may result in electric
shock.
1. Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User’s Manual
2
War nin g
Never connect the power supply cables to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the Frequency inverter.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter.
Make sure that all the connecting wires comply with the requirement of EMC and the safety standard in
the region. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals (P+) and (P-). Failure to comply may
result in a fire.
1.1.4 Before power-on
Danger
Check that the fo llowing requirements comply with:
The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the frequency inverter.
The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected.
No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
The wiring is fastened.
Failure to comply will result in damage to frequency inverter.
Cover the frequency inverter properly before power-on to prevent electric shock.
War nin g
Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the frequency inverter because such test has
been done in the factory. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
All peripheral devices must be connected properly under the instructions described in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in accidents.
1.1.5 After power-on
Danger
Do not open the frequency inverter ’s cover after power-on to prevent from electric shock.
Do not touch the frequency inverter with wet hand and its peripheral circuit to prevent from electric
shock.
Do not touch the terminals of the frequency inverter (including the control terminals). Failure to comply
may result in electric shock.
Do not touch the U, V, W terminal or motor connecting terminals when frequency inverter automatically
does safety testing for the external high-voltage electrical circuit. Failure to comply may result in
electric shock.
War nin g
Note the danger during the rotary running of motor when check the parameters. Failure to comply will
result in accidents.
Do not change the factory default settings of the frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in
damage to the frequency inverter.
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
3
1.1.6 During operation
Danger
Do not go close to the equipment when selected the restart function. Failure to comply may result in
personal injury.
Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature. Failure to comp ly will result
in personal injury.
Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personal during operation
War nin g
Avoid objects falling into the frequency inverter when it is running. Failure to comply will result in
damage to frequency inverter.
Do not start/stop th e frequency inverter by turning the contactor ON/OFF. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the frequency inverter.
1.1.7 Maintenance
Danger
Do not repair or ma intain the frequency inverter at power-on. Failure to comply will result in electric
shock.
Repa ir or maintain the frequency inverter only after the charge light on frequency inverter is powered
off. This allows for the residual voltage in the capacitor to discharge to a safe value. Failure to comply
will result in personal injury.
Repair or maintenance of the frequency inverter may be performed only by qualified personnel. Failure
to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the frequency inverter.
1.2 General Precautions
1.2.1 Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused after being stored
for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from
damaging the frequency inverter. The motor must be disconnected from the frequency inverter during the
insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for the test. The insulation resistance must not
be less than 5 MΩ.
1.2.2 Thermal protection of motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the frequency inverter, especially when
the frequency inverter's rated power is greater than the motor's, adjust the motor protection parameters on
the operation panel of the frequency inverter or install a thermal relay in the motor circuit for protection.
1.2.3 Running at over 50 Hz
The frequency inverter provides frequency output of 0 to 3000 Hz (Up to 300 Hz is supported if the
frequency inverter runs in VC and SVC mode). If the frequency inverter is required to run at over 50 Hz,
consider the bearable capacity of the machine.
1. Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User’s Manual
4
1.2.4 Vibration of mechanical device
The frequency inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies, which
can be avoided by setting the skip frequency.
1.2.5 Motor heat and noise
The output of the frequency inverter is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic
frequencies, and therefore, the motor temperature, noise, and vibration are slightly greater than those motor
runs at grid power frequency (50 Hz).
1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter
Do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor at
the output side of the frequency inverter because the output of the frequency inverter is PWM wave.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter may suffer transient over current and even to be damaged.
1.2.7 Contactor at the Input/Output side of the frequency inverter
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the frequency inverter and the power supply, the
frequency inverter must not be started or stopped by switching the contactor on or off. If the frequency
inverter has to be operated by the contactor, ensure that the time interval between switching is at least one
hour. Since frequently charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the capacitor inside of
frequency inverter.
When a contactor is installed between the output side of the frequency inverter and the motor, do not turn
off the contactor when the frequency inverter is active. Otherwise, IGBT modules inside of frequency
inverter may be damaged.
1.2.8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range
The frequency inverter must not be used over the allowable voltage range specified in this manual.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter's components may be damaged. If required, use a corresponding voltage
transformer device.
1.2.9 Prohibition of three-phase input cha nged into two-phase input
Do not change the three-phase input of the frequency inverter to two-phase input. Otherwise, a fault will be
result or the frequency inverter will be damaged.
1.2.10 Surge suppressor
The frequency inverter has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge voltage.
For frequently surge place, please add extra surge voltage protection device at input side of frequency
inverter.
Note: Do not connect the surge suppressor at the output side of the AC.
1.2.11 Altitude and de-rating
In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it is necessary to
de-rate the frequency inverter. Please contact our company for technical support.
1.2.12 Some special usages
If wiring that is not described in this manual such as common DC bus is applied, please contact the agent or
our company for technical support.
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
5
1.2.13 Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas
is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Please treat them as industrial waste.
1.2.14 Adaptable Motor
The standard adaptable motor is adaptable four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous induction motor. For other
types of motor, select a proper frequency inverter according to the rated motor current. If user uses inverter
for permanent magnet synchronous motor, please contact my company for technical support.
The cooling fan and rotor shaft of non-variable-frequency motor are coaxial, which results in reduced
cooling effect when the rotational speed decreasing. If variable speed is required, add a more powerful fan
or replace it with variable-frequency motor in applications where the motor overheats easily.
The standard parameters of the adaptable motor have been configured inside the frequency inverter. It is
still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions.
Otherwise, the running result and protection performance will be affected.
The frequency inverter may alarm or even be damaged when short-circuit exists on cables or inside the
motor. Therefore, perform insulation short-circuit test when the motor and cables are newly installed or
during routine maintenance. During the test, make sure that the frequency inverter is disconnected from the
tested parts.
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
6
2. Product Information
2.1 Designation Rules
Diagram 2-1 Designation rules
2.2 Nameplate
Diagram 2-2 Nameplate
2.3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter
Table 2-1 Models and technical data of EM11
Model
Adaptable Motor Input
Current
(A)
Output
Current
(A)
Power
Capacity
(KVA)
Thermal Power
Consumption
(KW)
KW HP
Single-phase 220V，50/60Hz
EM11-G1-d75 0.75 1.0 8.2 4 1.5 0.030
EM11- G1-1d5 1.5 2.0 14 7 3.0 0.055
EM11- G1-2d2 2.2 3.0 23 9.6 4.0 0.072
Three-phase 220V，50/60Hz
EM11-G2-d75 0.75 1 5 3.8 3 0.030
EM11- G2-1d5 1.5 2 5.8 5.1 4 0.055
EM11- G2-2d2 2.2 3 10.5 9 5.9 0.072
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
7
Model
Adaptable Motor Input
Current
(A)
Output
Current
(A)
Power
Capacity
(KVA)
Thermal Power
Consumption
(KW)
KW HP
EM11- G2-004 3.7 5 14.6 13 8.9 0.132
EM11- G2-5d5 5.5 7.5 26 25 17 0.214
EM11- G2-7d5 7.5 10 35 32 21 0.288
EM11- G2-011 11 15 46.5 45 30 0.489
EM11- G2-015 15 20 62 60 40 0.608
EM11- G2-018 18.5 25 76 75 57 0.716
EM11- G2-022 22 30 92 91 69 0.887
EM11- G2-030 30 40 113 112 85 1.11
EM11- G2-037 37 50 157 150 114 1.32
EM11- G2-045 45 60 180 176 134 1.66
EM11- G2-055 55 75 214 210 160 1.98
EM11- G2-075 75 100 307 304 231 2.02
Three-phase 380V，50/60Hz
EM11- G3-d75 0.75 1 3.4 2.1 1.5 0.027
EM11- G3-1d5 EM11- P3-1d5 1.5 2 5 3.8 3 0.050
EM11- G3-2d2 EM11- P3-2d2 2.2 3 5.8 5.1 4 0.066
EM11- G3-004 EM11- P3-004 3.7 5 10.5 9 5.9 0.120
EM11- G3-5d5 EM11- P3-5d5 5.5 7.5 14.6 13 8.9 0.195
EM11- G3-7d5 EM11- P3-7d5 7.5 10 20.5 17 11 0.262
EM11- G3-011 EM11- P3-011 11 15 26 25 17 0.445
EM11- G3-015 EM11- P3-015 15 20 35 32 21 0.553
EM11- G3-018 EM11- P3-018 18.5 25 38.5 37 24 0.651
EM11- G3-022 EM11- P3-022 22 30 46.5 45 30 0.807
EM11- G3-030 EM11- P3-030 30 40 62 60 40 1.01
EM11- G3-037 EM11- P3-037 37 50 76 75 57 1.20
EM11- G3-045 EM11- P3-045 45 60 92 91 69 1.51
EM11- G3-055 EM11- P3-055 55 75 113 112 85 1.80
EM11- G3-075 EM11- P3-075 75 100 157 150 114 1.84
EM11- G3-090 EM11- P3-090 90 125 180 176 134 2.08
EM11- G3-110 EM11- P3-110 110 150 214 210 160 2.55
EM11- G3-132 EM11- P3-132 132 200 256 253 192 3.06
EM11- G3-160 EM11- P3-160 160 250 307 304 231 3.61
EM11- G3-200 EM11- P3-200 200 300 385 377 250 4.42
EM11- G3-220 EM11- P3-220 220 300 430 426 280 4.87
EM11- G3-250 EM11- P3-250 250 400 468 465 355 5.51
EM11- G3-280 EM11- P3-280 280 370 525 520 396 6.21
EM11- G3-315 EM11- P3-315 315 500 590 585 445 7.03
EM11- G3-355 EM11- P3-355 355 420 665 650 500 7.81
EM11- G3-400 EM11- P3-400 400 530 785 725 565 8.51
EM11- P3-450 450 600 883 820 630 9.23
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
8
2.4 Technical Specifications
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of EM11
Item Specifications
Standard
functions
Maximum frequency
Vector control: 0~300 Hz
V/F control: 0~3000 Hz
Carrier frequency
0.5–16 kHz (The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted
based on the load features.)
Input frequency resolution
Digital setting: 0.01 Hz
Analog setting: maximum frequency x 0.025%
Control mode
Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
Closed-loop vector control (VC)（+ PG card）
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
Startup torque
G type: 0.5 Hz/150% (SVC); 0 Hz/180% (VC)
P type: 0.5 Hz/100%
Speed range 1:100 (SVC) Speed range
Speed stability accuracy
± 0.5% (SVC)
± 0.02% (VC)
Torque control accuracy ± 5% (VC)
Overload capacity
G type: 60s for 150% of the rated current, 3s for 180% of the
rated current
P type: 60s for 120% of the rated current, 3s for 150% of the
rated current
Torque boost
Auto boost
Manual boost 0.1%~30.0%
V/F curve
Straight-line V/F curve
Multi-point V/F curve
N-power V/F curve (1.2-power, 1.4-power, 1.6-
p
ower,
1.8-power, square)
V/F separation Two types: complete separation; half separation
Acceleration/deceleration
curve
Straight-line ramp
S-curve ramp
Four groups of acceleration/deceleration time with the range
of 0.0s~65000s
DC braking
DC braking frequency: 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Braking time: 0.0s~36.0s
Braking trigger current value: 0.0%~100.0%
Standard
functions
JOG control
JOG frequency range: 0.00 Hz~50.00 Hz
JOG acceleration/deceleration time: 0.00s~6500.0s
Built-in simple PLC,
multiple speeds
It realizes up to 16 speeds via the simple PLC function or
combination of DI terminal states.
Built-in PID It realizes closed loop control system easily.
Auto voltage regulation
(AVR)
It can keep constant output voltage automatically when the
mains voltage fluctuation.
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
9
Item Specifications
Overvoltage/ Over current
stall control
The current and voltage are limited automatically during the
running process so as to avoid frequently tripping due to
overvoltage / over current.
Rapid current limit
function
It can auto limit running current of frequency inverter to
avoid frequently tripping.
Torque limit and control
(Excavator characteristics) It can limit the torque
automatically and prevent frequently over current tripping
during the running process.
Torque control can be implemented in the VC mode.
Individualized
functions
High performance
Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor are
implemented through the high-
p
erformance current vector
control technology.
Instant power off not stop
The load feedback energy compensates the voltage reduction
so that the frequency inverter can continue to run for a short
time.
Rapid current limit
To avoid frequently over current faults of the frequency
inverter.
Virtual I/O Five groups of virtual DI/DO can realize simple logic control.
Timing control Time range: 0.0~6500.0 minutes
Multi-motor switchover
Two motors can be switched by two groups of motor
parameters.
Multiple communication
protocols
It supports communication bus via Modbus-RTU,
PROFIBUS-DP, CANlink and CANopen.
Motor overheat protection
The optional I/O extension card enables AI3 to receive the
motor temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to
realize motor overheat protection.
Multiple encoder types
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder,
open-collector encoder, resolver, UVW encoder, and SIN/
COS encoder.
Advanced background
software
It supports the operation of frequency inverter parameters and
virtual oscillograph function, by which the state of frequency
inverter can be monitored.
RUN Running command giving
key panel
Control terminals
Serial communication port
You can switch between these giving in various ways.
RUN
Frequency giving
There are 10 kinds frequency giving: digital setting, analog
voltage setting, analog current setting, pulse setting and serial
communication port setting.
You can switch between these giving in various ways.
Auxiliary frequency giving
There are 10 kinds auxiliary frequency giving. It can
implement tiny tuning of auxiliary frequency and frequency
synthesis.
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
10
Item Specifications
RUN
Input terminal
Standard:
6 digital input (DI) terminals, one of which supports up to 50
kHz high-speed pulse in put
2 analog input (AI) terminals, one of which only supports
0V~10 V voltage input and the another supports 0V~10 V
voltage input or 0~20 mA current input expanding capacity:
many DI terminals
1 AI terminal that supports -10V~10 V voltage input.
Output terminal
Standard
1 high-speed pulse output terminal (open-collector) that
supports 0–50 kHz square wave signal output.
1 digital output (DO) terminal.
1 relay output terminal.
2 analog output (AO) terminals, one of them supports 0~20
mA current output or 0V~10 V voltage output expanding
capacity:
many DO terminals.
many relay output terminals.
Display and
keypad
operation
LED display It displays the parameters.
LCD display
It is optional, supports panel display in Chinese or English
language.
Parameters copy Optional LCD keypad can copy parameters.
Key locking and function
selection
It can lock the keys partially or completely and define the
function range of some keys so as to prevent misoperation.
Protection mode
Motor short-circuit detection at power-on, input/output phase
loss protection, over current protection, overvoltage
protection, less voltage protection, overheat
p
rotection and
overload protection,etc.
Environment
Installation location
Indoor, no direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible
gas, oil smoke, vapour, drip or salt.
Altitude Lower th an 1000 m
Ambient temperature
-10°C~ +40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is
between 40°C and 50°C)
Humidity Less than 95%RH, without condensing
Vibration Less than 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 g)
Storage temperature -20°C ~ +60°C
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
11
2.5 Product appearance and installation dimension
2.5.1 Product appearance
Diagram 2-3 Product appearance
Diagram 2-4 Appearance and installation dimension of EM11 series (Plastic housing structure)
Diagram 2-5 Appearance and installation dimension of EM11 series (Metal housing structure)
The housing types of the EM11 models are listed in the following table.
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
12
Voltage & Power
Housing Type
Single-phase 220 V
0.4–2.2 kW Plastic housing
Three-phase 220 V
0.4–4 kW Plastic housing
5.5–75 kW Sheet metal housing
Three-phase 380 V
0.75–7.5 kW Plastic housing
11~400 kW S heet metal housing
2.5.2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension (mm) of EM11 Frequency Inverter
Table 2-3 Appearance and installation hole dimension (mm) of EM11 frequency inverter
Model
Appearance and installing dimension（mm）
W W1 H H1 D Φd
Single-phase 220V
EM11-G1-d75
EM11- G1-1d5
EM11- G1-2d2
Three-phase 220V
EM11-G2-d75
EM11- G2-1d5
EM11- G2-2d2
160 148 247 235 177 Φ5.5
EM11- G2-004
EM11- G2-5d5
220 126 349 334 194 Φ7
EM11- G2-7d5
EM11- G2-011
290 230 455 440 218 Φ7
EM11- G2-015
EM11- G2-018
320 230 555 540 240 Φ10
EM11- G2-022
EM11- G2-030
410 320 635 610 239 Φ12
EM11- G2-037
EM11- G2-045
460 320 654 630 340 Φ12
EM11- G2-055
EM11- G2-075
560 420 847 820 348 Φ14
Three-phase 380V
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
118 106.5 185 175.5 157 Φ4.5
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
160 148 247 235 177 Φ5.5
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
220 126 349 334 194 Φ7
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
13
Model
Appearance and installing dimension（mm）
W W1 H H1 D Φd
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
290 230 455 440 218 Φ7
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
320 230 555 540 240 Φ10
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
410 320 635 610 239 Φ12
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
460 320 654 630 340 Φ12
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
560 420 847 820 348 Φ14
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
700 520 956 920 368 Φ14
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
EM11- G3-315/P3-355
800 620 1232 1200 378 Φ18
EM11- G3-355/P3-400
EM11- G3-400/P3-450
2.5.3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray)
Diagram 2-6 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray)
2.6 Options
Please indicate if the following options are needed when placing order.
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
14
Table 2-4 Options of EM11 frequency inverter
Item Model Functions Remarks
Internal
braking unit
With”-B” after the
product model
Single-phase:0.4kw~2.2kw;
Three-phase: 0.75kw~15kw, Standard
built-in brake unit
The internal braking
unit is optional for
18.5kw~75kw.
External
braking unit
External braking unit for above
75kw(including 75kw)
Energy-rege
neration unit
Energy saving product makes the electric
energy of frequency inverter feedback to
the AC power grid.
Rectifying
unit
To use the unit when many frequency
inverters use the one DC bus, the way
can save energy.
2.7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters
2.7.1 Daily maintenance
Due to the influence of temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, it will lead to poor heat dissipation and
component aging of frequency inverter, and results in potential failure or reducing the service life of
frequency inverter. Therefore, it is necessary to do daily and regular maintenance of the frequency inverter.
Daily check items:
1. Check if the sound is normal during the running of the motor;
2. Check if there is a vibration during the runn ing of the motor;
3. Check whether the installation environment of frequency inverter has changed;
4. Check if the cooling fan of frequency inverter is working correctly, the cooling air duct is clear;
5. Check if the frequency inverter is overheating;
6. Make sure that the frequency inverter should always be kept in a clean state;
7. Clear up effectively the dust on the surface of the frequency inverter, prevent the dust from entering into
the inside of the frequency inverter, especially for the metal dust;
8. Clear up effectively the oil and dust on the cooling fan of frequency inverter.
2.7.2 Regular inspection
Please regularly check frequency inverter, especially for the difficult checking place of running.
Regular inspection items:
1. Check the air duct and clear up regularly;
2. Check if there are any loose screws;
3. Check if the inverter has been corroded;
4. To do insulation test for the main circuit;
5. Check if the terminals have arcing mark.
Note: When using the megger(please use the DC 500V meg ohm meter) to measure the insulation
resistance, you shall disconnect the main circuit to the frequency inverter. Do not use the insulation
resistance meter to test the control circuit. Do not to do the high voltage test (It has been done when the
frequency inverter producing in factory.)
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
15
2.7.3 Wearing parts replacement
The wearing parts of frequency inverter include the cooling fan and filting electrolytic capacitor, its service
life is closely related to the using environment and maintenance status. The general service life is:
Part Name Service Life
Fan 3 to 4 Years
Electrolytic capacitor 5 to 6 Years
The user can confirm the replace time according to the running time.
1. Possible reasons for the damage of cooling fan: bearing wear and blade aging. Distinguish standard:
Any cracks in the fan blade, any abnormal vibration sound during the starting of frequency inverter.
2. Possible reasons for the damage of filting electrolytic capacitor: poor quality of the input power supply,
the environment temperature is higher, the load change frequently and the electrolyte aging. Distinguish
standard: Any leakage of its liquid, if the safety valve is protruding, elec trostatic capacitance and
insulation resistance measurement.
2.7.4 Storage of the frequency inverter
After buying the frequency inverter, users shall pay attention to the temporary and long-term storage as
following:
1. Store the frequency inverter in the original packaging;
2. Long-term storage can lead to the degradation of electrolytic capacitors, and must ensu re to power on
for once within 2 years. And the power-on time is at least 5 hours. The input voltage must slowly rise to
the rating by using the voltage regulator.
2.8 Warranty Items
1. Warranty only refers to frequency inverter.
2. Under normal use, if there is any failure or damage, o ur company is responsible for the warranty within
12 months. (Leave factory date is subjected to the S/N on the frequency inverter nameplate or the
contract). When over 12 months, reasonable maintenance fee will be charged;
3. During 12 months, if the following situation happens, certain maintenance fee will be charged;
a) The users don’t follow the manual stated makes the frequency inverter damaged;
b) The damage caused by fire, flood and abnormal voltage;
c) The damage caused by using the frequency inverter for abnormal functions;
d) The relevant service fee is calculated according to the manufacturer’s standard, if there is contract,
then it carries out subject to the contract.
2.9 Selection Guide of braking component
Table 2-5 is the recommended value of braking resistor, users can select the different resistance value and
power according to the actual situation,(but the resistance value must not be less than the recommended
value in the table, and the power can be bigger.) The selection of braking resistance need to be confirmed
according to the power that the motor generated in the practical application systems, and is relevant to the
system inertia, deceleration time, the energy of the potential energy load, needs customers to choose
according to actual situation. The greater the inertia the shorter deceleration time is needed and more
frequently braking, so the braking resistor needs the one with bigger power but smaller resistance value.
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
16
2.9.1 Selection of braking resistance value
When braking, almost all the renewable energy of motor is consumed on the braking resistor.
According to the formula: U * U/R = Pb
In the formula:
U --- The braking voltage when the system brake stably (different system is different, for the 380VAC
system generally take 700V)
R - Braking resistor
Pb – Power of braking
2.9.2 Selection power of braking resistor
In theory the power of braking resistor is consistent with the braking power, but it need to be taken into
consideration that the braking resistor power will derate to 70%.
According to the formula: 0.7*Pr=Pb*D
In this formula:
Pr----Power of resistor
D---- Braking proportion (the proportion that the regeneration process accounts for the whole process)
Elevator---- 20%~30%
Uncoiling and coiling machine---- 20% ~30%
Centrifugal machine---- 50%~60%
Occasionally braking load---- 5%
Other machine generally-----10%
Table 2-5 EM11 Inverter braking components selection table
Model
Recommend
power of
braking resistor
Recommend
resistance value of
braking resistor
Braking
unit
Remarks
Single-phase 220V
EM11-G1-d75
80W ≥ 150Ω
EM11- G1-1d5
100W ≥ 100Ω
EM11- G1-2d2
100W ≥ 70Ω
Three-phase 220V
EM11-G2-d75
150W ≥ 110Ω
EM11- G2-1d5
250W ≥ 100Ω
EM11- G2-2d2
300W ≥ 65Ω
EM11- G2-004
400W ≥ 45Ω
EM11- G2-5d5
800W ≥ 22Ω
EM11- G2-7d5
1000W ≥ 16Ω
EM11- G2-011
1500W ≥ 11Ω
Built-in as
option
Add ”-B” to the
model
EM11- G2-015
2500W ≥ 8Ω
EM11- G2-018
3.7 kW ≥ 8.0Ω
EM11- G2-022
4.5 kW ≥ 8Ω
EM11- G2-030
5.5 kW ≥ 4Ω
EM11- G2-037
7.5 kW ≥ 4Ω
EM11- G2-045
4.5 kW×2 ≥ 4Ω×2 External
EM11- G2-055
5.5 kW×2 ≥ 4Ω×2 External
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
17
Model
Recommend
power of
braking resistor
Recommend
resistance value of
braking resistor
Braking
unit
Remarks
EM11- G2-075
16k W ≥ 1.2Ω External
Three-phase 380V
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
150W ≥ 300Ω
Built-in as
standard
No special
instructions
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
150W ≥ 220Ω
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
250W ≥ 200Ω
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
300W ≥ 130Ω
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
400W ≥ 90Ω
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
500W ≥ 65Ω
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
800W ≥ 43Ω
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
1000W ≥ 32Ω
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
1300W ≥ 25Ω
Built-in as
option
Add ”-B” to the
model
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
1500W ≥ 22Ω
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
2500W ≥ 16Ω
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
3.7 kW ≥ 16.0Ω
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
4.5 kW ≥ 16Ω
Built-in as
option
Add ”-B” to the
model
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
5.5 kW ≥ 8Ω
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
7.5 kW ≥ 8Ω
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
4.5 kW×2 ≥ 8Ω×2
External EM-BU3
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
5.5 kW×2 ≥ 8Ω×2
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
6.5 kW×2 ≥ 8Ω×2
External EM-BU3H
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
16kW ≥ 2.5Ω
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
20 kW ≥ 2.5Ω
External EM-BU4H
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
22 kW ≥ 2.5Ω
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
12.5 kW×2 ≥ 2.5Ω×2
External EM-BU5H
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
14 kW×2 ≥ 2.5Ω×2
EM11- G3-315/P3-355
16 kW×2 ≥ 2.5Ω×2
EM11- G3-355/P3-400
17 kW×2 ≥ 2.5Ω×2
External EM-BU4H*2
EM11- G3-400/P3-450
14 kW×3 ≥ 2.5Ω×3
2.9.3 Braking resistor connection description
The braking resistor connection of EM11 series frequency inverter is showed as below:
Diagram 2-7 Braking resistor connection scheme
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
18
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
3.1 Installation environment
1. The place with indoor vents or ventilation devices.
2. The environment temperature shall be -10℃~40℃. If the temperature is over 40℃but less than 50℃,
better to take down the cover of frequency inverter or open the front door of cabinet to facilitate heat
dissipation.
3. Try to avoid high temperature and wet place; the humidity shall be less than 90% without frost deposit.
4. Avoid direct sunlight.
5. Keep away from flammable, explosive and corrosive gas and liquid.
6. No dust, floating fiber and metal particles.
7. Install on the place without strongly vibration. And the vibration should be not over 0.6G, Especially pay
attention to far away from the punching machine, etc.
8. Keep away from electromagnetic interference source.
3.2 Installation direction and space
In order to not affect the service life of frequency inverter and reduce its performance, note for its
installation direction and space and correctly fasten it.
Diagram3-1 Ventilating duct installation dimension diagram of frequency inverter
Power class
Installation dimension
A B
≤7.5kW ≥ 20mm ≥ 100mm
11kW - 30kW ≥ 50mm ≥ 200mm
≥ 37kW ≥ 50mm ≥ 300mm
Please install the frequency inverter vertically, to send out the heat upward, and pay attention to direction of
frequency inverter to avoid inversion.
If there are several units of frequency inverter installed, please install them side by side, do not to install up
and down.
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
19
3.3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram
Diagram 3-2 Peripheral Devices Connection
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
20
3.4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices
Table 3-1 Main circuit peripheral devices use instructions
Parts Name
Installation
Location
Function Description
MCCB
Front of input
circuit
The capacity of the circuit breaker shall be 1.5 to 2 times of the
rated current of the inverter.
The protect time of the circuit breaker shall fully consider the time
features of the inverter overload protection.
Residual-current
circuit
breaker(RCCB)
Front of input
circuit
As the inverter output is the high-frequency pulse output, there
will be high-frequency leakage current. Special leakage circuit
b
reaker shall be used when installing leakage circuit breaker at the
input side of the inverter.
It is suggested that B type leakage circuit breaker be used, and the
leakage current value shall be set as 300mA.
Contactor
Between MCCB
and frequency
inverter input side
Frequently open and close of contactor will cause inverter failure,
so the highest frequency for opening and closing of contactor shall
be not exceeded than 10 times/min when braking resistor is used,
to avoid the over-hot damage of the braking resistor, thermal
protection relay with braking resistor over-hot detection shall be
installed, by terminal of the thermal protection relay to disconnect
the contactor.
Input AC reactor
or DC reactor
Frequency inverter
input side / near
the frequency
inverter
The inverter power supply capacity is more than 600kVA or 10
times of the inverter capacity.
If there is switch type reactive-load compensation capacitor or
load with silicon control at the same power node, there will be
high peak current flowing into input power circuit, causing the
damage of the rectifier components.
When the voltage unbalancedness of the three-
p
hase power supply
of the inverter exceeds 3%, the rectifier component will be
damaged.
It is required that the input power factor of the inverter shall be
higher than 90%.
When the above situations occurred, install the AC reactor at the
input side of the inverter or DC reactor to the DC reactor terminal.
Input noise filter
The frequency
inverter input side
To reduce the noise input from the power to the inverter or output
from the inverter to the power.
Thermal
protection relay
The output side of
frequency inverter
Although the inverter has motor overload protection function,
when one inverter drives two or more motors or multi-
p
ole motors,
to prevent the motor over-temperature failure, thermal protection
relay shall be installed between the inverter and each motor.
Output filter
The output side of
frequency inverter
When the output side of the inverter is connected with output
filter, the conduction and radiation interference can be reduced.
Output AC
reactor
Between the output
side of frequency
inverter and motor,
near the frequency
inverter
When the cable connecting the inverter and the motor is longer
than 100meters, it is suggested to install AC output reactor to
suppress the high-frequency oscillation to avoid the damage to
motor insulation, large leakage current and frequent inverter
protective action.
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
21
3.5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices
Table 3-2 Model Selection Diagram of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices (Recommended)
Frequency inverter
Model
MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Input Side
Main Circuit
(mm2)
Cable of Output
Side Main Circuit
(mm2)
Cable of
Control Circ uit
(mm2)
Single-phase 220V
EM11-G1-d75 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11-G1-1d5 20 16 4.0 2.5 1.0
EM11-G1-2d2 32 20 6.0 4.0 1.0
Three-phase 220V
EM11-G2-d75
16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11- G2-1d5
16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11- G2-2d2
25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G2-004
32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G2-5d5
63 40 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G2-7d5
63 40 6.0 6.0 1.0
EM11- G2-011
100 63 10 10 1.0
EM11- G2-015
125 100 16 10 1.0
EM11- G2-018
160 100 16 16 1.0
EM11- G2-022
200 125 25 25 1.0
EM11- G2-030
200 125 35 25 1.0
EM11- G2-037
250 160 50 35 1.0
EM11- G2-045
250 160 70 35 1.0
EM11- G2-055
350 350 120 120 1.0
EM11- G2-075
500 400 185 185 1.0
Three-phase 380V
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
10 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
40 32 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
63 40 4.0 4.0 1.0
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
63 40 6.0 6.0 1.0
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
100 63 6 6 1.0
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
100 63 10 10 1.0
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
125 100 16 10 1.0
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
160 100 16 16 1.0
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
200 125 25 25 1.0
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
250 125 35 25 1.0
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
250 160 50 35 1.0
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
22
Frequency inverter
Model
MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Input Side
Main Circuit
(mm2)
Cable of Output
Side Main Circuit
(mm2)
Cable of
Control Circ uit
(mm2)
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
350 160 70 35 1.0
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
350 350 120 120 1.0
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
400 400 150 150 1.0
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
500 400 185 185 1.0
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
630 600 150*2 150*2 1.0
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
630 600 150*2 150*2 1.0
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
800 600 185*2 185*2 1.0
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
800 800 185*2 185*2 1.0
EM11- G3-315/P3-355
1000 800 150*3 150*3 1.0
EM11- G3-355/P3-400
1000 800 150*4 150*4 1.0
EM11- G3-400/P3-450
1200 1000 150*4 150*4 1.0
3.6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover
3.6.1 Removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad)
The operating panel of EM11 series Frequency inverter is a plug type, If you need to take it off when use or
maintenance, please make sure the gentle actions, or it is easy to damage the plug type connection terminals
on operating panel.
The removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad) is showed as Diagram3-3 and Diagram3-4:
Diagram 3-3 Removal of operating panel (keypad) Diagram 3-4 Mounting of operating panel (keypad)
3.6.2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter
The EM11 series frequency inverter above 7.5kw (380V) uses plastic case. The removal and mounting of
upper cover refers Diagram3-5. Please use tool to push the hooks on both side of lower cover.
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
23
Diagram 3-5 The cover removal of plastic case
The EM11 series frequency inverter above 11kw (380V) uses metal case. The removal and mounting of
lower cover refers figure3-6. Using thumb to unscrew and push lower cover and raise the cover.
Diagram 3-6 EM11 series layout sketch
3.7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description
Diagram 3-7 EM11 Series terminal distribution diagram
Control Circuit
Ter min al s
Main Circuit
Term ina ls
Grounding
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
24
3.8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals
3.8.1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals
3.8.1.1 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of single-phase 220V model
Including model: Single-phase 220V: EM11-G1-d75～EM11-G1-2d2
Ter min al sym bol Function description
P+、PB
Connecting terminals of braking resistor
P+、P-
Input terminals of DC power
/ E
Grounding terminal
L1、L2
Single-phase AC power input terminals
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3
Three-phase AC power outpu t terminals
3.8.1.2 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three-phase 220V/380V Small Power Standard Models
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-d75～EM11-G2-7d5
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-d75/P3-1d5～EM11-G3-015/P3-018
Ter min al sym bol Function description
P+、PB
Connecting terminals of braking resistor
P+、P-
Input terminals of DC power
/ E
Grounding terminal
R/L1、S/L2、T/L3
Three-phase AC power input terminals
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3
Three-phase AC power outpu t terminals
3.8.1.3 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three-phase 220V/380V Middle and Big Power Standard
Models
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-011～EM11-G2-075
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-018/P3-022～EM11-G3-400/P3-450
Ter min al sym bol Function description
R/L1、S/L2、T/L3
Three-phase AC power input terminals
P、P+
Connecting terminals of external DC reactor, Normally short circuited
with copper bar.
P+、P-
DC power input terminals; DC output terminals of external braking unit
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3
Three-phase AC power outpu t terminals
/ E
Grounding terminal
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
25
3.8.1.4 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Model with optional internal braking units
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-011～EM11-G2-037
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-018/P3-022～EM11-G3-075/P3-090
Terminal symbol Function description
R/L1、S/L2、T/L3
Three-phase AC power input terminals
P+ 、P-
DC power input terminals
P+、PB
Braking resistor connecting
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3
Three-phase AC power output terminals
/ E
Grounding terminal
Note: Product with standard built-in unit can realize DC bus and braking function at the same time, if
external DC reactor and braking function is needed, please contact the manufacturer.
3.9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring
3.9.1 Power Supply Wiring
It is forbidden to connect the power cable to the inverter output terminal, otherwise, the internal
components of the inverter will be damaged.
To facilitate the input side over current protection and maintenance after power off, the inverter shall
connect to the power supply through the circuit breaker or leakage circuit breaker and contactor.
Please confirm that the power supply phases, rated voltage are consistent with that of the nameplate,
otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
3.9.2 Motor Wiring
It is forbidden to short circuit or ground the inverter output terminal, otherwise the internal components
of the inverter will be damaged.
Avoid short circuit the output cables or with the inverter enclosure, otherwise there exists the danger of
electric shock.
It is forbidden to connect the output terminal of the inverter to the capacitor or LC/RC noise filter with
phase lead, otherwise, the internal components of the inverter may be damaged.
When contactor is installed between the inverter and the motor, it is forbidden to switch on/off the
contactor during the running of the inverter, otherwise, there will be large current flowing into the
inverter, triggering the inverter protection action.
Length of cable between the inverter and motor
If the cable between the inverter and the motor is too long, the higher harmonic leakage current of the
output end will produce by adverse impact on the inverter and the peripheral devices. It is suggested that
when the motor cable is longer than 100m, output AC reactor be installed. Refer to the following table
for the carrier frequency setting.
Length of cable between the inverter and motor Carrier frequency (d6-00)
Less than 50m Less than 15kHz
Less than 100 m Less than 10kHz
More than 100m Less than 5kHz
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
26
3.9.3 Grounding Wiring
The inverter will produce leakage current. The higher the carrier frequency is, the larger the leakage
current will be. The leakage current of the inverter system is more than 3.5mA, and the specific value of
the leakage current is determined by the use conditions. To ensure the safety, the inverter and the motor
must be grounded.
The grounding resistance shall be less than 10ohm. For the grounding wire diameter requirement, refer
to 2.6 electrotype of main circuit peripheral devices.
Do not share grounding wire with the welding machine and other power equipment.
In the applications with more than 2 inv erters, keep the grounding wire from forming a loop.
Diagram 3-8 Grounding Wire Connection Sketch Map
3.9.4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference
Diagram 3-9 Connection of conduction and radiation interference solutions
When the input noise f ilter is installed, the wire connecting the filter to the inverter input power end
shall be as short as possible.
The filter en closure and mounting cabinet shall be reliably grounded in large area to reduce the back
flow impedance of the noise current Ig.
The wire connecting the inverter and the motor shall be as short as possible. The motor cable adopts
4-core cable, with the grounding end grounded at the inverter side, the other end connected to the motor
enclosure. The motor cable shall be sleeved into the metal tube.
The input power wire and output motor wire shall be kept away from each other as far as possible.
The equipment and signal cables vulnerable to influence shall be kept far away from the inverter.
Key signal cables shall adopt shielding cable. It is suggested that the shielding layer shall be grounded
with 360-degree grounding method and sleeved into the metal tube. The signal cable shall be kept far
away from the inverter input wire and output motor wire. If the signal cable must cross the input wire
and output motor wire, they shall be kept orthogonal.
When analog voltage and current signals are adop ted for remote frequency setting, twinning shielding
cable shall be used. The shielding layer shall be connected to the grounding terminal PE of the inverter,
and the signal cable shall be no longer than 50m.
The w ires of the control circuit terminals RA/RB/RC and other control circuit terminals shall be
separately routed.
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
27
It is forb idden to short circuit the shielding layer and other signal cables and the equipment.
When the inverter is connected to the inductive load equipment (e.g. electromagnetic contactor, relay
and solenoid valve), surge suppressor must be installed on the load equipment coil, as showed in
Diagram 3-10
Diagram 3-10 Application example of inductive load surge suppressor
3.10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description
3.10.1 Control Circuit and Main C ircuit Wiring
Diagram 3-11 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
28
3.10.2 Control Circuit Terminal Layout
Diagram 3-12 EM11 Control Circuit Terminal Sketch Map
3.10.3 Description of control circuit terminals
Table 3-4 Description of control circuit terminals
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Terminal function description
Power
Supply
+10V-GND
External
+10V power
supply
Provide +10V power supply to external unit. Maximum
output current:10mA
Generally, it provides power supply to external
potentiometer with resistance range of 1 kΩ~5kΩ
+24V-COM
External
+24V power
supply
Provide +24 V power supply to external unit. Generally, it
provides power supply to DI/DO terminals and external
sensors. Maximum output current: 200 mA
J4
External
power supply
input terminal
Connect to +24 V by default.
When DI1-DI6 need to be driven by external sig nal, J4
must switch to be “OFF” status.
Analog
input
AI1-GND
Analog input
terminal 1
1. Input voltage range: DC 0V~10 V
2. Input Impedance: 22 kΩ
AI2-GND
Analog input
terminal 2
1. Input range: DC 0V~10V/ 0mA~20mA, decided by
jumper J5 on the control board
2. Impedance: 22 kΩ (voltage input), 500 Ω (current input)
Digital
input
DI1
Digital input
1
1. Optical coupling isolation, c ompatible with dual polarity
input
2.Input Impedance: 2.4 kΩ
3. Voltage range for level input: 9V~30 V
DI2
Digital input
2
DI3
Digital input
3
DI4
Digital input
4
DI5
Digital input
5
HDI
High Speed
Pulse Input
Terminal
Besides features of DI1~DI5 and it can be used for
high-speed pulse input.
Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz
Analog
output
AO1-GND
Analog
output
terminal 1
Voltage or current output is dec ided by jumper J6.
Output voltage range: 0V~10 V
Output current range: 0mA~20 mA
AO2-GND
Analog
output
terminal 2
Output voltage range: 0V~10V
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
29
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Terminal function description
Digital
output
DO1-CME
Digital output
1
Optical coupling isolation, d ual polarity open collector
output.
Output voltage range: 0V~24 V
Output current range: 0mA~50 mA
Note that CME and COM are internally insulated, but they
are shorted by jumper externally by factory defa ult. In this
case DO1 is driven by +24 V, If you want to drive DO1 by
external power supply, please remove jumper between
CME and COM.
FM- COM
High Speed
Pulse Output
Terminal
It is set by b4-00 (FM terminal output mode selection)
As high-speed pulse output, the maximum frequency hits
100 kHz.
As open-collector output, its function is the same as that of
DO1.
Relay
output
FM- COM
High Speed
Pulse Output
Terminal
It is set by b4-00 (FM terminal output mode selection)
As high-speed pulse output, the maximum frequency hits
100 kHz.
As open-collector output, its function is the same as that of
DO1.
TA-TB NC terminal
Contact driving capacity: 250 VAC, 3 A, COSø = 0.4
DC 30 V, 1 A
Auxiliary
interface
TA-TC NO terminal
JP1
Extension
card interface
Connect to an optional card (I/O e xtension card, PLC card
and various bus cards)
J8
PG card
interface
Support various types of PG cards: OC, differe ntial, UVW
ABZ and resolver.
3.10.4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals
When the voltage signal is used as analog input, it is vulnerable from outside interference. Please use
shielding cable, and ensure that the shielding cable reliably connect to the grounding. The cable should be
as short as possible, and keep away from power lines. In serious interference occasions, you might consider
to add a filter capacitor or ferrite core in signal cable.
Diagram 3-13 Wiring of analog input terminals
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
30
3.10.5 Wiring of Multi-functional Input Terminals
Diagram 3-14 Wiring of digital input terminals in four different modes
3.10.6 Wiring of digital output terminals when using internal and external power supply
3-15 Internal power supply wiring 3-16 External power supply wiring
Note: When external power supply is adopted, please connect negative end of external power supply with
terminal COM. The maximum current of open-collector output is 50mA.If the external load is a relay,
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
31
please install a fly-wheel diode to the two sides of relay. Please correctly install the polarity of fly-wheel
diode, otherwise control card and DSP can be damaged.
3.10.7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper
Jumper Name Function Description Default Setting
J3
When the jumper is “ON”, it connects with 485 communication
resistor.
When the jumper is “OFF”, it disconnects with 485 communication
resistor
OFF
J4
When the jumper is “ON”, DI terminals use internal power supply.
When the jumper is “OFF’, DI terminals use external power supply.
ON
J5
When the jumper is “V”, AI2 is with voltage input (0V~10V).
When the jumper is “I”, AI2 is with current input (0mA~20mA).
V
J6
When the jumper is “V”, AO1 is with voltage output (0V~10V).
When the jumper is “I”, AO1 is with current output (0mA~20mA).
V
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual
32
4. Operation and display
4.1 Instruction of operation and display
Diagram 4-1 EM11 main keypad
Diagram 4-2 EM11-G1/G3E keypad
1. Description of indicator
EM11 User’s Manual 4. Operation and display
33
RUN: OFF indicates that the frequency inverter is in the stop state and ON indicates that the frequency
inverter is in the running state.
LOCAL: It indicates whether the frequency inverter is operated by operation keypad, terminals or remoter
(communication). OFF indicates keypad operation control state; ON indicates terminals operation control
state; Blinking indicates remote operation control state.
DIR: It is Forward/Reversal indicator, ON indicates forward rotation.
TRIP: Tunning/ Torque Control/Fault indicator
When the indicator is ON, it indicates torque control mode. When the indicator is blinking slowly, it
indicates the auto-tuning state. When the indicator is blinking quickly, it indicates the fault state.
2. Unit ind icator
Hz: frequency unit;
A: Current unit;
V: Voltage unit
3. Digital display area
The 5-digit LED display is able to display the set frequency, output frequency, monitoring data and fault
codes.
4. Description of Keys on the Operation panel (keypad)
Table 4-1 Keypad function table
Key Name Function
PRG/ESC
Programming
Enter or exit menu level I.
DATA/ENTER
Confirmation
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the
parameter setting.
Increment
Increase data or function code.
Decrement
Decrease data or function code.
Shift
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running state,
and select the digit to be modified when modifying parameters.
RUN
RUN
Start the frequency inverter in the operation panel control mode.
STOP/RESET
Stop/Reset
Stop the frequency inverter when it is in the running state and
perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state. The
functions of this key are restricted by b9-00.
MF.K
Multi-function
Perform function switchover according to the setting of b9-01
QUICK
Menu mode
selection
Perform switchover between menu modes according to the setting
of A0-08(The default is a menu mode).
4.2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes
The operation panel of the EM11 adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and function code
setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual
34
Diagram 4-3 Operation procedure on the operation panel
Instruction: We can return to level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER.
The difference between them is:
After you press ENTER, the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes back to Level II menu
and shifts to the next function code.
After you press PRG, the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly returns to Level II menu
and remains at the present function code.
Under the Level III state, if there is no blinking digit of this parameter, then it indicates that the parameter
can not to be modified. The possible reasons are:
1. This function code is a non-modifiable parameter, such as the actual testing parameters, operation
records, etc.
2. This function code cannot be modified under the running state, but can modify after stopping.
4.3 Parameter Display Mode
The establishment of parameter display is to make the user conveniently to check the parameters in
different permutation modes. Three kinds of parameter display modes are offered.
Name Description
Function parameter mode
sequential display the function parameters of frequency inverter, includes
parameter group b0～bF, C0～C6, d0～d6, A0～A1 and U0
Customized parameter mode
Several function parameters (max 32)customized to display are need to
confirmed by Group A1
Modifiable parameter mode The function parameters can be different with the factory parameter
Relevant function parameters are A0-08, as follows:
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A0-08
Display of customized
parameter
Bit: User-defined parameter QUICK display
selection.
0: No Display
1: Display
Ten bit: User-changed parameter QUICK
display selection.
0: No Display
1: Display
0
When user defined customized parameters, at this time user can switch into different parameter display
mode by the QUICK key.
All parameter display mode display the code as follows:
EM11 User’s Manual
4. Operation and display
35
Parameter Display Mode Display
Base mode -dFLt
User-defined mode -user
User-modified mode -chGd
Switching mode is as follows:
Diagram 4-4 Quick viewing mode of function codes
4.4 The operation of User-defined Fast Menu of Parameters
User-defined menu is set to facilitate user to quickly view and modify the commonly used function codes.
In this mode, the display parameter “ub0.02” is function code “b0-02”. User also can modify parameters
value in this menu, the effect is same as modifying in common menu.
The user-defined parameters set by group A1. If A1 is set to A0.00, it indicates that no function codes are
available. The max 32 parameters can be defined in group A1. If "NULL" is displayed, it indicates that the
user-defined menu is empty.
A total of 16 parameters are pre-stored in the user-defined fast menu, as listed in the following table.
b0-01 Control mode
b0-02 Command source selection
b0-03 Main frequency source X selection
b0-07 Frequency source selection
b0-12 Preset frequency
b0-21 Acceleration time
b0-22 Deceleration time
b3-00 DI1 function selection
b3-01 DI2 function selection
b3-02 DI3 function selection
b4-04 DO1 output selection
b6-01 AO1 output selection
b1-00 Start mode
b
1-10 Stop mode
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual
36
d2-00 V/F curve setting
d2-01 Torque boost
User can modify the user-defined fast menu based on actual requirements.
4.5 Monitoring Status Parameters
In the stop or running state, you can press “ ” on the operation panel to display status parameters.
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the binary bits of values converted from the values of
b9-02(running parameter 1), b9-03(running parameter 2), and b9-04(stopping parameter) in the
hexadecimal format.
In stop state, there are 16 status parameters you can select to displayed or not, they are: setting frequency,
bus voltage, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog input AI2 voltage, analog
input AI3 voltage, count value, length value, PLC running step, load speed, PID setting, PULSE input
frequency and three reserved parameters.
In running state, there are five running state parameters: running frequency, setting frequency, bus voltage,
output voltage and output current. This five parameters are default displaying. The other display parameter
includes output power, output torque, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog
input AI2 voltage, analog input AI3 voltage, count value, length value, linear speed, PID setting, PID
feedback, etc. You can set whether these parameters are displayed by setting b9-02 and b9-03.
When the frequency inverter is repowered on again after power failure, the parameters are recorded as
before power failure and displaying.
4.6 Password Setting
The frequency inverter provides the user password protection function. When A0-00 is set to a non-zero
value, the value is the user password. The password takes effect after you exit the function code editing
state. When you press PRG key, “------” will be displayed, and you must enter the correct user password to
enter the menu.
To cancel the password protection function, enter with password and set A0-00 to 0.
4.7 Motor parameter auto-tuning
Select vector control running mode, before frequency inverter start to operate, you must accurately write in
the nameplate parameter of motor by keypad. EM11 frequency inverter will match standard motor
parameter according to the nameplate; the vector control mode strongly depended on motor’s parameters, if
you want to get good control performance, then you must let inverter to obtain the exact parameters of
controlled motor.
The process of motor auto-tuning is as follows:
Firstly, select command source (b0-03) as keypad command channel. Then write in the actual motor
parameters as the following parameters (according to the nameplate of present motor):
EM11 User’s Manual 4. Operation and display
37
Motor Parameter
Motor 1
b0-00：Motor Type Selection
d0-01：Motor Rated Voltage
d0-03：Motor Rated Frequency
d0-00：Motor Rated Power
d0-02：Motor Rated Current
d0-04：Motor Rated Speed
Motor 2
b0-00：Motor Type Selection
d2-01：Motor Rated Voltage
d2-03：Motor Rated Frequency
d2-00：Motor Rated Power
d2-02：Motor Rated Current
d2-04：Motor Rated Speed
AC asynchronous motor tuning
If the motor can be disconnected from the load, then please set d0-30/d2-30 to 2(asynchronous motor
complete auto-tuning), then press the RUN key on the keypad. The frequency inverter will au tomatically
calculate the following parameters of motor:
Motor Parameter
Motor 1
d0-05：Stator resistance (asynchronous motor)
d0-06：Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor)
d0-07：Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
d0-08：Mutual inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
d0-09：No-load current(asynchronous motor)
Motor 2
d2-05：Stator resistance (asynchronous motor)
d2-06：Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor)
d2-07：Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
d2-08：Mutual inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
d2-09：No-load current(asynchronous motor)
Finish motor parameter auto-tuning.
If the motor cannot be fully disconnected with the load, then please select d0-30/d2-30 as 1 (asynchronous
static auto-tuning), and press the RUN key in the keypad panel.
And the frequency inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of motor:
Motor Parameter
Motor 1
d0-05：Stator resistance (asynchronous motor)
d0-06：Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor)
d0-07：Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
Motor 2
d2-05：Stator resistance (asynchronous motor)
d2-06：Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor)
d2-07：Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
Description of synchronous motor identification:
As the EM11 driven synchronous machine system needs the feedback signal from encoder, so uses need to
correctly set the parameter of encoder before identification.
During the identification process of synchronous system, rotation movement is needed. The best
identification method is no-load dynamic running identification, if the condition is not allowed; with-load
dynamic identification is workable.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
38
5. Description of Function Codes
5.1 Group b0: Basic Function Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-00 Motor type selection
Unit’s digit: Motor 1 selection
Ten’s digit: Motor 2 selection
0: AC asynchronous motor
1: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
0
Unit’s digit: 0- select Motor 1 as AC asynchronous motor;
1-select Motor 1 as Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Ten’s digit: 0-select Motor 2 as AC asynchronous motor;
1-select Motor 2 as Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-01 M otor control mode
Unit's digit: Motor 1 control mode selection.
Ten's digit: Motor 2 control mode selection.
0: Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
2:V/F control
Hundred’s digit/Thousand’s digit: reserved
Ten thousand’s digit: Motor selection
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
0
Unit’s digit and Ten’s digit is to select motor 1 and motor 2 control mode.
0: Sensor less vector control (SVC)
It indicates open-loop vector control, and is applicable to high-performance control applications such as
machine tool, centrifuge, wire drawing machine and injection molding machine. One frequency inverter can
operate only one motor.
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
It is applicable to high-accuracy speed control or torque control applications such as high-speed paper
making machine, crane and elevator. One Frequency inverter can oper ate only one motor. An encoder must
be installed at the motor side, and a PG card ma tching the encoder must be installed at the frequency
inverter side.
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to applications with low req uirements or applications where one frequency inverter operates
multiple motors, such as fan an d pump.
Note: If vector control is used, motor auto-tuning must be performed b ecause the advantages of vector
control can only be utilized after correct motor parameter s are obtained. Better performance can be achieved
by adjusting speed regulator para meters in group “d”.
For the permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM), the EM11 does not support SVC. VC is used
generally. In some low requirements applications, you can also use V/F.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-02 Command source selection
0: Keypad control (LED off)
1: Terminal control (LED on)
2: Communication control (LED blinking)
0
It is used to determine the input chann el of the frequency inverter control commands, such as run, stop,
forward rotation, reverse rotation and jog operation. You can input the commands in the fo llowing three
channels:
0: Keypad control ("LOCAL/REMOT" indicator off)
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
39
Commands are given by pressing keys “RUN” and “STOP/RESET” on the o peration panel.
1: Terminal control ("LOCAL/REMOT" indicator on)
Commands are given by means of multifunctio nal input terminals with functions such as FWD, REV, JOGF,
and JOGR.
2: Communication control ("LOCAL/RE MOT" indicator blinking)
Commands are given from host computer. For m ore details please refer to the appendix of communication
protocol.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-03
Main frequency source X
selection
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after
power off)
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power
off)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
0
It is used to select the setting channel of the main frequ ency. You can set the main frequency in the
following 10 channels:
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12, UP/DOWN modifiable, not record at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequen cy is the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency). You can change the set
frequency by pressing and on the operation panel (or using th e UP/DOWN function of input
terminals).
When the Frequency inverter is powered on again af ter power failure, the set frequency reverts to the value
of b0-12.
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12, UP/DOWN modifiable, record at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequen cy is the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency). You can change the set
frequency by pressing keys and on the operation panel (or using the UP/DOWN functions of input
terminals).
When the frequency inverter is powered on again after power f ailure, the setting frequency is the value
memorized at the moment of the last power failure.
Note that b0-10 (record digital setting frequency of power failure) determines whether the set frequency is
memorized or cleared when the frequency inverter stops. It is re lated to stopping rather than power failure.
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
The frequency is set by analog input. The EM11 control board provides two analog input (AI) termina ls
(AI1, AI2). Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card.
Including:
AI1: 0V~10 V voltage input;
AI2: 0V~10 V voltage input or 4mA~20 mA current input, determined by jumper on the control card;
AI3: -10V~10 V voltage input
The corresponding relationship curve between the inpu t voltage of AI1, AI2 and AI3 and the target
frequency can be user-defined.
When AI is used as the freque ncy setting source, the corresponding value 100% of th e voltage/current input
corresponds to the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency).
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
The frequency is set by DI6 (high-speed pulse). The signal specification of pulse setting is 9V~ 30V (voltage
range) and 0 kHz~100 kHz (frequency range). Pu lse can be only input by DI6.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
40
The relation between DI6 terminal input p ulse frequency and corresponding setting is set by b5-00~ b5-03.
The corresponding relation is the linear relation of these two points. T he corresponding value 100% of pulse
setting corresponds to the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency).
6: Multi-function
In Multi-segment speed mode, co mbinations of different DI terminal states correspond to d ifferent set
frequencies. The EM11 supports a maximum of 16 spe eds implemented by 16 state combinations of four DI
terminals (set with functions 12 to 15) in Group C1. The multiple segments speed indicates percentages of
the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency ).
If a DI terminal is used for the Mu lti-function function, you need to perform related setting in group b3. For
details, refer to the descriptions of Group b3.
7: Simple PLC (built-in)
When the simple programmable logic controller (P LC) mode is used as the frequency source, the running
frequency of the frequency inverter can be switched over among the 16 frequenc y references. You can set
the holding time and acceleration /deceleration time of the 16 frequency references. For deta ils, refer to the
descriptions of Group C2.
8: PID
The output of PID control is used as the running frequency. PID control is generally used in on-site
closed-loop control, such as constant pressure closed-loop control and constant tension closed-loop control.
When applying PID as the frequency source, you need to set parameters of “PID function” in group C0.
9: Communication setting
The frequency is set by means of communicatio n.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-04
Auxiliary frequency source Y
selection
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after
power off)
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power
off)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
1
When used as an independent frequency input channel (frequency source switched over from X to Y), the
auxiliary frequency source Y is used in th e same way as the main frequency source X (refer to b0-03).
When the auxiliary frequency source is used for operation (frequency source is "X and Y operation"), pay
attention to the following aspects:
1. If the auxiliary frequency source Y is digital setting, the preset frequency (b0-12) does not take effect.
You can directly adjust the set main freque ncy by pressing keys and on the operation panel (or
using the UP/DOWN function of in put terminals).
2. If the auxiliary frequency source is analog input (AI1, AI2 and AI3) or pulse setting, 100% of the input
corresponds to the range of the auxiliary frequency Y (set in b0-05 and b0-06).
3. I f the auxiliary frequency source is pulse setting, it is similar to analog input.
Note: The main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y must not use the same channel. That
is, b0-03 and b0-04 cannot be set to the same value in case of confusion.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-05
Selection of auxiliary frequency
Y range
0: Relative to maximum frequency
1: Relative to main frequency X
0
b0-06 Range of auxiliary frequency Y 0%~150% 100%
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
41
If X and Y operation is used, b0-05 and b0-06 are used to set the adjustment range of the auxiliary
frequency source.
You can set the auxiliary frequency to be relative to either maximum frequency or main frequency X. If
relative to main frequency X, the setting range of the auxiliary frequency Y varies according to the main
frequency X.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-07 Frequency source selection
Unit's digit: Frequency source selection.
0: Main frequency source X
1: X and Y calculation (calculation result
determined by ten's digit)
2: Switchover between X and Y
3: Switchover between X and "X and Y
calculation"
4: Switchover between Y and "X and Y
calculation"
Ten's digit: X and Y calculation relationship
0: X+Y
1: X-Y
2: Maximum of them
3: Minimum of them
0
It is used to select the frequency setting channel. Frequency se tting can be realized by the main frequency
source X and auxiliary frequency source Y operation.
Diagram 5-1 Target frequency setting
If the frequency source involves X and Y operation, you can set the frequency off set in b0-08 for
superposition to the X and Y operation result, flexibly sa tisfying various requirements.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-08
Frequency offset of auxiliary
frequency source of X and Y
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
42
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is set to "X and Y operation". The final frequency is
obtained by adding the frequency offset se t in this parameter to the X and Y operation result.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-09
Binding command source to
frequency source
Unit's digit: Binding keypad command to
following frequency source.
0: No binding
1: Frequency source by digital setting
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
Ten's digit: Binding terminal command to
frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Binding communication
command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Thousand’s digit: Automatically running
binding to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
0
It is used to bind the three running c ommand sources with the nine frequency sources, facilitating to
implement synchronous switchover.
For details on the frequency sources, see the description of b0-03 (Main f requency source X selection).
Different running command sources can be bo und to the same frequency source.
If a command source has bound to a frequency source, this frequency source set in b0-03~ b0-07 no longer
takes effect when this command source is effective.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-10
Record of digital setting
frequency of power failure
0: not record
1:record
1
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting.
If b0-10 is set to 0, the digital s etting frequency value restore to the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency) after
the frequency inverter stops. The modification by us ing keys and or the terminal UP/DOWN
function is cleared to zero.
If b0-10 is set to 1, the digita l setting frequency value is the set frequency at the moment wh en the frequency
inverter stops. The modification by usin g keys and or the terminal UP/ DOWN function remains is
record and valid.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-11
Frequency unit
1: 0.1 Hz
2: 0.01 Hz
2
It is used to set the resolution of all f requency-related parameters.
If the resolution is 0.1 Hz, the EM11 can output up to 3000.0Hz. If th e resolution is 0.01 Hz, the EM11 can
output up to 300.00 Hz.
Note:
Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency-related parameters change and
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
43
corresponding frequency values change display.
This parameter is not restored wh en factory fault setting is done.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-12
Preset frequency
0.00 ~ maximum frequency (b0-13)
50.00 Hz
If the frequency source is digital setting or terminal UP/DOWN, the value of this parameter is the initial
frequency of the frequency inverter (digital setting).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-13
Maximum frequency
50.00~3000.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
When the frequency source is AI, pulse setting (D I6), or Multi-segment speed, the 100% of input
corresponds to the value of this pa rameter.
The output frequency of the EM11 can reach up to 3000 Hz. To take both frequency reference resolution
and frequency input range into consideration, y ou can set the number of decimal places for frequency
reference in b0-11.
If b 0-11 is set to 1, the frequency reference resolution is 0.1 Hz. In this case, the setting range of b0-13 is
50.0 to 3000.0 Hz.
If b0 -11 is set to 2, the frequency reference resolution is 0.01 Hz. In this case, th e setting range of b0-13
is 50.00 to 300.00 Hz.
Note: After the value of b0-11 is modified, the frequency resolution of all frequency related function codes
change accordingly.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-14
Source of frequency upper
limit
0: Set by (b0-15)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0
It is used to set the source of the frequency upper limit, including digital setting (b0-15), AI, pulse setting or
communication setting. If the frequency upper limit is set by means of AI1, AI2, AI3, DI5 or
communication, the setting is similar to that of the main fre quency source X. For details, see the description
of b0-03.
For example, to avoid runaway in torque control mode in winding machine application, you can set the
frequency upper limit by means of analog inpu t. When the frequency inverter reaches the upper limit, it will
run at this limited speed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-15
Frequency upper limit
Frequency lower limit (b0-17)~maximum
frequency (b0-13)
50.00 Hz
This parameter is used to set the freque ncy upper limit.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-16
Frequency upper limit offset
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz
If the source of the frequency upper limit is analog input or pu lse setting, the final frequency upper limit is
obtained by adding the offset in th is parameter to the frequency upper limit set in b0-14.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-17
Frequency lower limit
0.00 Hz ~frequency upper limit(b0-15)
0.00 Hz
If the frequency command is lower than the value of this p arameter, the frequency inverter can stop, or run
at the frequency lower limit, or run at zero speed. The result can be determined by b2-17(setting frequency
lower than frequency lower limit r unning mode).
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
44
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-18
Rotation direction
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction
0
You can change the rotation direction o f the motor just by modifying this parameter without changing th e
motor wiring. Modifying this para meter is equivalent to exchanging any two phase of the motor' s U, V, W
wires.
Note:
The motor will restore original running direct ion after parameter initialization (A0-09). Do not use this
function in applications where chang ing the rotating direction of the motor is prohibited after system
commissioning is complete.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-19
Base frequency for UP/
DOWN modification during
running
0: Running frequency
1: Setting frequency
0
This parameter is valid only wh en the frequency source is digital setting.
It is used to set the base frequency to be modified by using keys and or the terminal UP/DOWN
function. If the running frequency and setting frequency are different, there will be a large difference
between the frequency inverter's performance du ring the acceleration/ deceleration process.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-20
Acceleration/Deceleration
mode
0: Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
0
It is used to set the frequency changing mode during the frequency inverter sta rt and stop process.
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases in linear mode. The EM11 provides four groups of
acceleration/deceleration time, w hich can be selected by using multi-function DI terminals (b3-00 to b3-1 1).
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
The output frequency increases or decreases along the S curve. This mode is generally used in the
applications where start and stop processes are re quired relatively smooth, such as elevator and conveyor
belt. The b0-23 and b0-24 respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment.
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
In this curve, the rated motor fre quency fb is always the inflexion point of S curve. This mode is usually
used in applications where acceler ation/deceleration is required at the speed higher than the rated frequency.
Diagram 5-2 S-curve acceleration/deceleration B diagram
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-21
Acceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Model
dependent
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
45
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-22
Deceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Model
dependent
Acceleration time indicates the time required by the freque ncy inverter to accelerate from 0 Hz to
"Acceleration / Deceleration base fre quency" (b0-26), that is, t1 in Diagram 6-3. Including, f is setting
frequency, fb is motor rated frequency, T is the acceleration time from 0 Hz to rated frequency fb.
Deceleration time indicates the time required by the frequency inverter to decelerate from "Acceleration /
Deceleration base frequency" (b0-26) to 0 Hz, that is, t2 in Diagram 6-3.
Diagram 5-3 Accele ration/Deceleration time
The EM11 provides totally four groups of acceleration/dece leration time for selection. You can perform
switchover by using a DI terminal. And you can set the four groups of acceleration/deceleration time
through the following function code s:
Group 1: b0 -21, b0-22
Group 2: b2 -03, b2-04
Group 3: b2 -05, b2-06
Group 4: b2 -07, b2-08
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-23
Time proportion of S-curve
start segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-24)
30.0%
b0-24
Time proportion of S-curve
end segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-23)
30.0%
These two parameters respectively defin e the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment of
S-curve acceleration/deceleration A.
In Diagram 6-4, t1 is the time defined in b0-23, within which the slope of the output frequency change
increases gradually. t2 is the time def ined in b0-24, within which the slope of the output frequency change
gradually decreases to 0. Within th e time between t1 and t2, the slope of the output frequency chan ge
remains unchanged, that is, linear acceleration/ deceleration.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
46
Diagram 5-4 S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-25
Acceleration/Deceleration
time unit
0:1s
1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s
1
To satisfy requirements of different applications , the EM11 provides three acceleration/ deceleration time
units, 1s, 0.1s and 0.01s.
Note: Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency-related parameters change
and corresponding frequency values change. Pay attention for this in on-site application.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-26
Acceleration/Deceleration
time base frequency
0: Maximum frequency (b0-13)
1: Set frequency
2: 100 Hz
0
The acceleration/deceleration time in dicates the time for the frequency inverter to increase from 0 Hz to the
frequency set in b0-26, figure 6-3 is the acceleration/deceleration time diagram. If this pa rameter is set to 1,
the acceleration/deceleration t ime is related to the set frequency. If the set f requency changes frequently, the
motor's acceleration/deceleration also changes.
5.2 Group b1: Start/Stop Control Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-00
Start mode
0: Direct start
1: Rotational speed tracking restart
2: Pre-excited start (AC asynchronous motor)
0
0: Direct start
If the DC braking time is set to 0, the frequency inverter starts to run from the startup frequency.
If the DC braking time is not 0, the frequency inverter performs DC braking first and then starts to run from
the startup frequency. It is app licable to small-inertia load application and to where th e motor is likely to
rotate at startup.
1: Rotational speed tracking restart
The frequency inverter judges the rotation al speed and direction of the motor firstly, and then starts at the
tracked frequency. Such smooth start has no impact on the rotating motor. It is applicable to the re start of
instantaneous power failure of large-ine rtia loads. To ensure the perfect performance of rotational speed
tracking restart, please set the m otor parameters correctly.
2: Pre-excited start (asynchronous motor)
It is valid only for asynchronous motor and used for building the magnetic field before the motor runs.
For pre-excited current and pre-excited time, see p arameters of b1-05 and b1-06.
If the pre-excited time is 0, the frequen cy inverter cancels pre-excitation and starts to run from startup
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
47
frequency.
If the pre-excited time is not 0, the freque ncy inverter pre-excites firstly before startup, improving the
dynamic response of the motor.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-01
Rotational speed tracking
mode
0: From frequency at stop
1: From zero speed
2: From maximum frequency
0
To complete the rotational speed tracking process within the shortest tim e, select the proper mode in which
the frequency inverter tracks the m otor rotational speed.
0: From frequency at stop
It is the commonly selected mo de.
1: From zero frequency
It is applicable to restart afte r a long time of power failure.
2: From the maximum frequency
It is applicable to the power-generatin g load.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-02
Rotational speed tracking
speed
1~100
20
In the rotational speed tracking restart mode, select the rotational s peed tracking speed. The larger the value
is, the faster the tracking is. However, too large value may cause unreliable tracking.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-03
Startup frequency
0.00~10.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
b1-04
Startup frequency holding
time
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
To ensure the motor torque at fre quency inverter startup, set a proper startup frequency . In addition, to build
excitation when the motor starts up, the startup frequency must be held for a certain period.
The startup frequency (b1-03) is not restricted by the frequency lower limit. If th e setting target frequency is
lower than the startup frequency, the frequency inverter will not start and stays in the holding state.
During switchover between forward rotatio n and reverse rotation, the startup frequency holding time is
disabled. The holding time is not inc luded in the acceleration time but in the running time of simple PL C.
Example 1:
b0-03 = 0 The frequency source is digital setting.
b0-12 = 2.00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 2.00 Hz.
b1-03 = 5.00 Hz The startup frequency is 5.00 Hz.
b1-04 = 2.0s The startup frequency holding time is 2.0s.
In this example, the frequency inverter stays in the holding state and the output frequency is 0.00 Hz.
Example 2:
b0-03 = 0 The frequen cy source is digital setting.
b0-12 = 10.00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 10.00 Hz.
b1-03 = 5.00 Hz The startup frequency is 5.00 Hz.
b1-04 = 2.0s The startup frequency ho lding time is 2.0s.
In this example, the frequency inverter accelerates to 5.00 Hz at 2s, and then accelerates to the set frequency
10.00 Hz.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-05
Startup DC braking current/
Pre-excited current
0%~100%
0%
b1-06
Startup DC braking time/
Pre-excited time
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
48
Startup DC braking is generally used du ring restart of the frequency inverter after the rotating motor sto ps.
Pre-excitation is used to make the frequency inverter build magnetic field for the asynchronous motor before
startup to improve the responsivenes s.
Startup DC braking is valid only for direct start (b1 -00 = 0). In this case, the frequency inverter performs
DC braking at the setting startup D C braking current. After the startup DC braking time, the f requency
inverter starts to run. If the star tup DC braking time is 0, the frequency inverter starts direc tly without DC
braking. The larger the startup DC bra king current is, the larger the braking force is.
If the startup mode is pre-excited start (b 1-00 = 3), the frequency inverter firstly builds magnetic field based
on the set pre-excited current. After th e pre-excited time, the frequency inverter starts to run. If th e
pre-excited time is 0, the freq uency inverter starts directly without pre-excitation.
The startup DC braking current o r pre-excited current is a percentage of motor rated current.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-07
Stop mode
0: Decelerate to stop
1: free stop
0
0: Decelerate to stop
After the stop command is enabled, the frequency inv erter decreases the output frequency according to the
deceleration time and stops when the frequency decreases to zero.
1: Free stop
After the stop command is enabled, the frequency inverter imm ediately stops the output. The motor will free
stop based on the mechanical inertia.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-08
DC braking initial frequency
of stopping
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.00 Hz
b1-09
DC braking waiting time of
stopping
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
b1-10
DC braking current of
stopping
0%~100%
0%
b1-11
DC braking time of stopping
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
b1-0 8 (Initial frequency of stop DC braking)
During the process of decelerating to stop, the frequency inverter s tarts DC braking when the running
frequency is lower than the valu e set in b1-08.
b1-0 9 (Waiting time of stop DC braking)
When the running frequency decreases to the initial frequency of stop DC braking, the fre quency inverter
stops output for a certain period and then starts DC braking. Th is prevents faults such as over current caused
due to DC braking at high speed.
b1-10 (Stop DC braking current)
This parameter specifies the o utput current at DC braking and is a percentage re lative to the motor rated
current. The larger the value is, the stronger the DC braking effe cts, but the more heat the motor and
frequency inverter emit.
b1-11 (Stop DC braking time)
This parameter specifies the holding time of DC braking. If it is set to 0, DC braking is cancelled. The stop
DC braking process is shown in the following figure.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
49
Diagram 5-5 Stop DC braking process
5.3 Group b2: Auxiliary Functions
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-00
JOG running frequency
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
6.00 Hz
b2-01
JOG acceleration time
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-02
JOG deceleration time
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
These parameters are used to define the set frequency and a cceleration/deceleration time of the frequency
inverter when jogging. The startup mode is fixed as "D irect start" (b1-00 = 0) and the stop mode is fixed as
"Decelerate to stop" (b1-07 = 0) during jogging.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-03
Acceleration time 2
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-04
Deceleration time 2
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-05
Acceleration time 3
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-06
Deceleration time 3
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-07
Acceleration time 4
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
b2-08
Deceleration time 4
0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
The EM11 provides a total of four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, that is, the above three groups
and the group b0-21 and b0-22. Definitions of four groups are comp letely the same, for more details, see the
description of b0-21 and b0-22. You can switch over betwe en the four groups of acceleration/deceleration
time through different state combina tions of DI terminals. For more details, see the descriptions of b3- 01 to
b3-011.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
50
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-09
Jump frequency 1
0.00 Hz ~maximum frequency
0.00 Hz
b2-10
Jump frequency 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.00 Hz
b2-11
Frequency jump amplitude
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.00Hz
If the setting frequency is within the jump frequency range, the actual running frequency is the jump
frequency close to the set frequency. Setting the jump freque ncy helps to avoid the mechanical resonance
point of the load.
The EM11 supports two jump frequencies. If both are set to 0, the frequency jump function is disabled. The
principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitu de is shown in the following figure 6-6.
Diagram 5-6 Principle of the jump frequencies an d jump amplitude
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-12
Jump frequency during
acceleration/ deceleration
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.00Hz
It is used to set whether the jump frequencies ar e valid during acceleration/deceleration.
When the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/d eceleration, and the running frequency is within
the frequency jump range, the actual running frequency will jump over the set frequency jump amplitude
(rise directly from the lowest jump frequency to the highest jump frequency). The following figure shows
the diagram when the jump frequencies are valid du ring acceleration/deceleration.
Diagram 5-7 Diagrams when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/deceleration
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
51
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-13
Frequency switchover point
between acceleration time 1
and acceleration time 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz
b2-14
Frequency switchover point
between deceleration time 1
and deceleration time 2
0.00 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz
This function is valid when motor 1 is selected and acc eleration/deceleration time switchover is not
performed by means of DI terminal. It is used to se lect different groups of acceleration/ deceleration time
based on the running frequency range rather tha n DI terminal during the running process of the frequency
inverter.
Diagram 5-8 Acceleration/deceleration time switchove r
During acceleration, if the running fre quency is smaller than the value of b2-13, acceleration time 1 is
selected. If the running frequency is larger than the value of b2-13, acceleration time 2 is selected.
During deceleration, if the running frequency is larger than the value of b2-14, deceleration time 1 is
selected. If the running frequency is smaller than the value of b2-14, deceleration time 2 is selected.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-15 Reverse running
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0
It is used to set whether the frequenc y inverter allows reverse rotation. In the applications whe re reverse
rotation is prohibited, set this parameter to 1.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-16
Forward/Reverse rotation
dead-zone time
0.0~3000.0s 0.0s
It is used to set the time when the o utput is 0 Hz at transition of the frequency inverter forward ro tation and
reverse rotation, as shown in the following figure.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
52
Diagram 5-9 Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-17
Running mode when set
frequency lower than
frequency lower limit
0: Run at frequency lower limit
1: Stop
2: Run at zero speed
0
It is used to set the frequency inverter running mode when the set frequency is lower than the frequency
lower limit. The EM11 provides three running modes to satisfy requirements of various applications.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-18
Droop control
0.00Hz~10.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
This function is used for balancing th e workload allocation when multiple motors are used to d rive the same
load. The output frequency of the frequency inv erters decreases as the load increases. You can reduce the
workload of the motor under load by decre asing the output frequency for this motor, implementing workload
balancing among multiple motors.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-19
Terminal JOG priority
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
It is used to set whether terminal JOG is priori ty.
If terminal JOG is priority, the f requency inverter switches to terminal JOG running state whe n there is a
terminal JOG command during the running proce ss of the frequency inverter.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-20
Setting power-on time reach
threshold
0~65000 h 0 h
If the accumulative power-on time (b9 -08) reaches the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO
terminal output ON signal.
For example, combining virtual DI/D O functions, to implement the function that the frequ ency inverter
reports an alarm when the actual accumulative power-on time reach es the threshold of 100 hours, perform
the setting as follows:
1. S et virtual DI1 to user-defined fault 1: b7-00 = 40.
2. Set that the valid state of virtual DI1 is from virtual DO1: b7-05 = 0000.
3. S et virtual DO1 to power-on time reached: b7-11= 25.
4. S et the accumulative power-on time reach threshold to 100 h: b2-20 = 100 h.
Then, the frequency inverter alarm output Err27 when the accumulative power-on time reaches 100 hours.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-21
Setting running time reach
threshold
0~65000 h 0 h
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
53
It is used to set the accumulative runni ng time threshold of the Frequency inverter. If the accumulative
running time (b9-09) reaches the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO terminal bec omes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-22
Action after running time
reached
0: Continue to run
1: Stop
0
This function is used to define the action after b2-21 preset time reached. Setting 0 inverte r will continue
work after present running time reached; and set 1, the inverter will sto p.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-23 Cooling fan control
0: Fan working during running
1: Fan working during power on
0
It is used to set the working mo de of the cooling fan. If this parameter is set to 0, the fan works when the
frequency inverter is in running state. When the frequency inverter stops, the cooling fan works if the
heatsink temperature is higher than 40°C, and stops working if the heatsink temperature is lower than 40°C.
If this parameter is set to 1, t he cooling fan keeps working after power-on.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-24 Dormant frequency 0.00Hz ~wakeup frequency (b2-26) 0.00 Hz
b2-25
Dormant delay time
0.0s~6000.0s
0.0s
b2-26 Wakeup frequency
Dormant frequency (b2-24)~ maximum
frequency (b0-13)
0.00 Hz
b2-27
Wakeup delay time
0.0s~6000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to implement the dormant and wakeup functions in the water supply application.
When the frequency inverter is in running state, the frequency inverter enters the dormant state and stops
automatically after the dormant delay time (b2-25) if the set frequency is lower than or equal to the dormant
frequency (b2-24).
When the frequency inverter is in do rmant state and the present running command is effective, the frequency
inverters starts up after the wakeup dela y time (b2-27) if the set frequency is higher than or equal to the
wakeup frequency (b2-26).
Generally, set the wakeup frequency should be equal to or h igher than the dormant frequency. If the wakeup
frequency and dormant frequency are set to 0 , the dormant and wakeup functions are disabled.
When the dormant function is enabled, if the frequency source is PID, whether PID operation is performed
in the dormant state is determined by C0-27. In this case, select PID operation enabled in the stop state
(C0-27 = 1).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-28 Timing function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
b2-29 Timing duration source
0: b2-30
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
(100% of analog input corresponds
to the value of b2-30)
0
b2-30
Timing duration
0.0min~6500.0 min
0.0 min
These parameters are used to implement the frequency inverter timing function.
If b2-28 is set to 1, the freq uency inverter starts to time at startup. When the se t timing duration reached, the
frequency inverter stops automatically, and meanwhile the corresponding DO outputs ON signal.
The frequency inverter starts timin g from 0.0min each time it starts up and the remaining timing duration c an
be checked by U0-20.
The timing duration is set in b2-29 and b2-30, in unit of minute.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
54
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-31
This time running time
reached threshold
0.0min~6500.0 min 0.0 min
If the present running time reache s the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO outputs ON signal,
indicating that present running time is reac hed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-32 Startup protection
0: No
1: Yes
0
This parameter is used to enable the frequency inverter safety protection. If it is set to 1, the frequency
inverter does not respond to the run command after power-on (for example, an input terminal is ON before
power-on). The frequency inverter responds only after the run comman d is cancelled and becomes valid
again.
In addition, the frequency inverter does not respond to the run command valid from fault reset of the
frequency inverter. The run protection can be disabled only after the run command is cancelled one time.
In this way, the motor will not automatically startup to avoid unexpected dangerous conditions for these
startup commands from power-on and fault reset.
5.4 Group b3: Input Terminals
The EM11 provides six digital input (DI) terminals (DI6 can be used for high-speed pulse input) and two
analog input (AI) terminals. Th e optional extension card provides another six DI terminals (DI7 t o DI12) and
one AI terminal (AI3).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-00 DI1 function selection 1: Forward RUN (FWD) Standard
b3-01 DI2 function selection 4: Forward JOG (FJOG) Standard
b3-02 DI3 function selection 9: Multi-function terminal 4 Standard
b3-03 DI4 function selection
12: clear to zero of UP and DOW N setting
(terminal, keypad)
Standard
b3-04 DI5 function selection
13: Terminal 1 for acceleration / deceleration
time selection
Standard
b3-05 DI6/HDI function selection
32: Pulse input (enabled only for HDI)
Standard
b3-06 DI7 function selection 0 Extended
b3-07 DI8 function selection 0 Extended
b3-08 DI9 function selection 0 Extended
b3-09 DI10 function selection 0 Extended
b3-10 DI11 function selection 0 Extended
b3-11 DI12 function selection 0 Extended
The following table lists the functions available fo r the DI terminals.
Table 6-1 Functions of DI terminals
Val u e Function Description
0 No function Set 0 for reserved terminals to avoid malfunction.
1
Forward RUN (FWD) or
running command
The terminal is used to control forward or reverse running of the
frequency inverter.
2
Reverse RUN (REV) or the
direction of FED/REV
3 Three-line control
The terminal determines three-line control of the frequency
inverter. For details, see the description of b3-13.
4 Forward JOG (FJOG) FJOG indicates forward JOG running, while RJOG indicates
reverse JOG running. The JOG frequency, acceleration time and
deceleration time are described respectively in b2-00, b2-01 and
b
2-02.
5 Reverse JOG (RJOG)
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
55
Val u e Function Description
6 Multi-function terminal 1
The setting of 16 speeds or 16 other references can be
implemented through combinations of 16 states of these four
terminals.
7 Multi-function terminal 2
8 Multi-function terminal 3
9 Multi-function terminal 4
10 Terminal UP If the frequency is determined by external terminals, the
terminals with the two functions are used as increment and
decrement commands for frequency modification.
When the frequency source is digital setting, they are used to
adjust the frequency.
11 Terminal DOWN
12
UP and DOWN setting clear
(terminal, operation panel)
If the frequency source is digital setting, the terminal is used to
clear the modification by using the UP/ DOWN function or the
increment/decrement key on the operation panel, returning the
set frequency to the value of b0-12.
13
Terminal 1 for acceleration/
deceleration time selection
Totally four groups of acceleration/deceleration time can be
selected through combinations of two states of these two
terminals.
14
Terminal 2 for acceleration/
deceleration time selection
15 Frequency source switchover
The terminal is used to perform switchover between two
frequency sources according to the setting in b0-07.
16
Switchover between main
frequency source X and preset
frequency
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency source X is
replaced by the preset frequency (b0-12).
17
Switchover between auxiliary
frequency source Y and preset
frequency
After this terminal is enabled, the frequency source Y is replaced
by the preset frequency (b0-12).
18
Terminal 1 for Command
source switchover
If the command source is set to terminal control (b0-02
= 1), this terminal is used to perform switchover between
terminal control and operation panel control.
If the command source is set to communication control (b0-02 =
2), this terminal is used to perform switchover between
communication control and operation panel control.
19
Terminal 2 for Command
source switchover
It is used to perform switchover between terminal control and
communication control. If the command source is terminal
control, the system will switch over to communication control
after this terminal becomes ON.
20
Speed control/Torque control
switchover
This terminal enables the frequency inverter to switch over
b
etween speed control and torque control. When this terminal
becomes OFF, the frequency inverter runs in the mode set in
d1-00. When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter
switches over to the other control mode.
21 Torque control prohibited
The Frequency inverter is prohibited from torque control and
enters the speed control mode.
22 PID pause
PID is invalid temporarily. The frequency inverter maintains the
present frequency output without supporting PID adjustment of
frequency source.
23 PID integral pause
After this terminal becomes ON, the integral adjustment
function pauses. However, the proportional and differentiation
adjustment functions are still valid.
24 Reverse PID action direction
After this terminal becomes ON, the PID action direction is
reversed to the direction set in C0-04.
25 PID parameter switchover
If the PID parameters switchover performed by means of DI
terminal (C0-12 = 1). When the terminal becomes OFF; the PID
parameters are C0-06~C0-08; when this terminal becomes ON,
the PID parameters switch to C0-09 ~ C0-11.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
56
Val u e Function Description
26 PLC status reset
The terminal is used to restore the original status of PLC control
for the frequency inverter when PLC control is started again
after a pause.
27 Swing frequency pause
The frequency inverter outputs the central frequency, and the
swing frequency function pauses.
28 Counter input This terminal is used to count pulses.
29 Counter reset This terminal is used to clear the counter status.
30 Length count inpu
t
This terminal is used to count the length.
31 Length reset This terminal is used to clear the length.
32
Pulse input (enabled only for
DI6/HDI)
DI6 is used for pulse input.
33
Frequency modification
forbidden
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter does not
respond to any frequency modification.
34
Acceleration/Deceleration
prohibited
It enables the frequency inverter to maintain the present
frequency output without being affected by external signals
(except the STOP command).
35 Motor selection terminal 1
Switchover among the two groups of motor parameters can be
implemented through this terminal.
36
Motor selection terminal 2
(Reserved)
Reserved.
37 Fault reset (RESET)
The terminal is used for fault reset function, the same as the
function of RESET key on the operation panel. Remote fault
reset is implemented by this function.
38
Normally open (NO) input of
external fault
If this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter reports
Err15 and performs the fault protection action. For more details,
see the description of bb-32.
39
Normally closed (NC) input of
external fault
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter reports
Err15 and performs the fault protection action. For more details,
see the description of bb-32.
40 User-defined fault 1 If these two terminals become ON, the frequency inverter
reports Err27 and Err28 respectively, and performs fault
protection actions based on the setting in bb-34.
41 User-defined fault 2
42 RUN pause
The frequency inverter decelerates to stop, but the running
p
arameters are all memorized, such as PLC, swing frequency
and PID parameters. After this function is disabled, the
frequency inverter restore to its status before stop.
43 Free stop
The frequency inverter blocks its output, the motor free stop and
is not controlled by the frequency inverter. It is the same as free
stop described in b1-07.
44 Emergency stop
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter stops
within the shortest time. During the stop process, the current
remains at the set current upper limit. This function is used to
satisfy the requirement of stopping the frequency inverter in
emergency state.
45 External STOP terminal 1
In operation keypad mode, this terminal can be used to stop the
frequency inverter, equivalent to the function of the STOP key
on the operation keypad.
46 External STOP terminal 2
In any control mode (operation panel, terminal or
communication), it can be used to make the frequency inverter
decelerate to stop. In this case, the deceleration time is
deceleration time 4.
47 Deceleration DC braking
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter
decelerates to the initial frequency of DC braking and then
switches over to DC braking state.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
57
Val u e Function Description
48 Immediate DC braking
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter directly
switches over to the DC braking state.
49 Clear this time running time
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter's this
time running time is cleared. This function must be supported by
b
2-28 and b2-31.
The four multi-function terminals have 16 state combinations, corresponding to 16 reference values, as listed
in the following table.
K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Settin
g
Corresponding Parameter
OFF OFF OFF OFF Reference 0 C1-00
OFF OFF OFF ON Reference 1 C1-01
OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 2 C1-02
OFF OFF ON ON Reference 3 C1-03
OFF ON OFF OFF Reference 4 C1-04
OFF ON OFF ON Refere nce 5 C1-05
OFF ON ON OFF Reference 6 C1-06
OFF ON ON ON Reference 7 C1-07
ON OFF OFF OFF Reference 8 C1-08
ON OFF OFF ON Reference 9 C1-09
ON OFF ON OFF Reference 10 C1-10
ON OFF ON ON Reference 11 C1-11
ON ON OFF OFF Reference 12 C1-12
ON ON OFF ON Reference 13 C1-13
ON ON ON OFF Reference 14 C1-14
ON ON ON ON Reference 15 C1-15
If the frequency source is multi-function, the value 100% of C1-00~ C1-15 corresponds to the value of b0-13
(Maximum frequency).
Besides as the multi-speed function, the multi-f unction can be also used as the PID setting source or the
voltage source for V/F separation, satisf ying the requirement on switchover of different setting values.
Table 5-2 Function description of Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminals
Terminal 2 Terminal 1
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Corresponding
OFF OFF Acceleration/Deceleration time 1
b
0-21, b0-22
OFF ON Acceleration/Deceleration time 2
b
2-03, b2-04
ON OFF Acceleration/Deceleration time 3
b
2-05, b2-06
ON ON Acceleration/Deceleration time 4
b
2-07, b2-08
Table 5-3 Function description of motor selec tion terminals
Terminal 1 Selected Motor Corresponding Parameters
OFF Motor 1 Group d0, Group d1, Group d2
ON Motor 2 Group d3, Group d4, Group d5
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-12 DI filter time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s
It is used to set the software filter ti me of DI terminal status. If DI terminals are liable to interfere nce and
may cause malfunction, increase the value of this parameter to enhance the anti-interference capability.
However, increase of DI filter time will slow down the response of DI terminals.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-13 Terminal command mode
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
2: Three-line mode 1
3: Three-line mode 2
0
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
58
This parameter is used to set the mode in which the frequency inverter is controlled by exte rnal terminals.
The following uses DI1, DI2 and DI3 among DI1 to DI12 as an example, with allocating functions of DI1,
DI2 and DI3 by setting b3-00 to b3-02.
0: Two-line mode 1
It is the most commonly used two-line mode, in which the forward/reverse rotation of the motor is decided
by DI1 and DI2. The parameters are set as belo w:
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 0 Two-line 1
b3-00 DI1 f unction selection 1 Forward RUN (FW D)
b3-01 DI2 f unction selection 2 Reverse RUN (REV)
Diagram 5-10 Setting of two-line mode 1
As shown in the preceding figure, when only K1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation.
When only K2 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs reverse rotation. When K1 and K2 are ON or OFF
simultaneous, the frequency inverter sto ps.
1: Two-line mode 2
In this mode, DI1 is RUN enabled termina l, and DI2 determines the running direction. The parameters are
set as below:
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 1 Two-line 2
b3-00 DI1 function selection 1 RUN enabled
b3-01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse
Diagram 5-11 Setting of two-line mode 2
As shown in the preceding figure, if K1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K2 is
OFF, and instructs reverse rotation when K2 is ON. If K1 is OFF , the Frequency inverter stops.
2: Three-line mode 1
In this mode, DI3 is RUN enabled terminal, and the direction is decided by DI1 and DI2. The parameters are
set as below:
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
59
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 2 Three-line 1
b3-00 DI1 function selection 1 Forward RUN (FWD)
b3-01 DI2 function selection 2 Reverse RUN (REV)
b3-02 DI3 function selection 3 Three-line control
Diagram 5-12 Setting of three-line mode 1
As shown in the preceding figure, if SB1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs fo rward rotation when Sb2
is pressed to be ON, and instructs reverse rotation when SB3 is pressed to be ON. The frequency inverter
stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF. During normal startup and running, SB1 must remain ON. The
frequency inverter's running state is determined by the final actions on SB1, SB2 and SB3.
3: Three-line mode 2
In this mode, DI3 is RUN enabled terminal. The RUN command is given by DI1 and the direction is decided
by DI2. The parameters are set as below:
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 3 Three-line 2
b3-00 DI1 function selection 1 RUN enabled
b3-01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse
b3-02 DI3 function selection 3 Three-line control
Diagram 5-13 Setting of three-line mode 2
As shown in the preceding figure, if SB1 is ON, the frequency inverter starts running when SB2 is pressed to
be ON; the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K is OFF and instructs reverse rotation when
K is ON. The Frequency inverter stops immediately after S B1 becomes OFF. During normal startup and
running, SB1 must remain ON，SB2 is effective immediately after ON action.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-14 Terminal UP/DOWN rate 0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s 0.100 Hz/s
It is used to adjust the ratio of changing of frequency for per second whe n the frequency is adjusted by
means of terminal UP/ DOWN.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
60
1. I f b0-11 (Frequency reference resolution) is 2, the setting range is 0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s.
2. I f b0-11 (Frequency reference resolution) is 1, the setting range is 0.01Hz/s~655.35 Hz/s.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-15
DI1 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-16
DI1 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-17
DI2 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-18
DI2 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-19
DI3 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-20
DI3 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-21
DI4 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-22
DI4 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-23
DI5 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b3-24
DI5 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to set the delay time of the freque ncy inverter when the status of DI terminals
changes.
The DI1 to DI5 support the delay time functio n.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-25 DI valid selection 1
Unit's digit: DI1 valid mode.
0: Low level valid
1: High level valid
Ten's digit: DI2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI3 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI4 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000
b3-26 DI valid selection 2
Unit's digit: DI6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI7 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI8 state.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI9 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI10 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000
These parameters are used to set the valid mode of DI terminals.
0: Low level valid
The DI terminal is invalid when being connected with COM, and valid when be ing disconnected from COM.
1: High level valid
The DI terminal is valid when being connected with COM, and invalid when being disconnected from COM.
5.5 Group b4: Output Terminals
The EM11 provides an analog output (AO) terminal, a digita l output (DO) terminal, a relay terminal and a
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
61
FM terminal (used for high-speed pulse output or o pen-collector switch signal output) as standard. If these
output terminals cannot satisfy requiremen ts, use an optional I/O extension card.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-00 FM terminal output mode
0: Pulse output (FMP)
1: Switch signal output (FMR)
1
The FM terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal. It can be used for high-speed pulse output (FMP),
with maximum frequency of 100 kHz. Refer to b6-00 for relevant func tions of FMP. It can also be used as
open collector switch signal output (FMR).
Code Parameter Name Default
b4-01 FMR func tion (open- collector output terminal) 0
b4-02 Relay 1 fun ction (TA-TB-TC)
2
b4-03 Reserved
b4-04 DO1 f unction selection (open-collector output terminal) 1
b4-05 DO2 function(extend)
0
b4-06 DO3 function(extend) 0
b4-07 DO4 function(extend) 0
b4-08 DO5 function(extend) 0
b4-09 DO6 function(extend)
0
These nine parameters are used to select the f unctions of the nine digital output terminals. TA-TB-TC and
P/A-P/B-P/C are respectively the relays on the control board and the extension card.
The functions of the output termina ls are described in the following table.
Value Function Description
0 No output The terminal has no function.
1 Ready for RUN
If the frequency inverter main circu it and control circuit become
stable, and the frequency inverter detects no fault and is re ady for
RUN, the terminal becomes ON.
2
Frequency inverter
running
When the frequency inverter is running and has output f requency (can
be zero), the terminal becomes ON.
3 Fault output (free stop)
When the frequency inverter stops due to a fault, the term inal becomes
ON.
4
Fault output(free stop
fault, no output at
under-voltage)
5 Swin g frequency limited
If the set frequency exceeds the frequency upper lim it or lower limit
and the output frequency of the frequency in verter reaches the upper
limit or lower limit, the te rminal becomes ON.
6 Torque limited
In speed control mode, if the output to rque reaches the torque limit,
the frequency inverter enters the stall protection sta te and meanwhile
the terminal becomes ON.
7
Frequency upper limit
reached
If the running frequency reaches the uppe r limit, the terminal becomes
ON.
8
Frequency lower limit
reached (no output at
If the running frequency reaches the lo wer limit, the terminal becomes
ON. In the stop state, the terminal becomes OFF.
9
Frequency lower limit
reached (having output at
stop)
If the running frequency reaches the low er limit, the terminal becomes
ON. In the stop state, the sig nal is still ON.
10 Reverse running
If the frequency inverter is in the reverse r unning state, the terminal
becomes ON.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
62
Value Function Description
11
Zero-speed running (no
output at stop)
If the frequency inverter runs with the output frequency of 0, the
terminal becomes ON. If the frequency inverter is in the stop state, the
terminal becomes OFF.
12
Zero-speed running 2
(having output at stop)
If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is 0, the terminal
becomes ON. In the state of stop, the signal is still ON.
13 Set count value reached
The terminal becomes ON when the count va lue reaches the value set
in C3-08.
14
Designated count value
reached
The terminal becomes ON when the count va lue reaches the value set
in C3-09.
15 Length reached
The terminal becomes ON when the detected actual length exceeds the
value set in C3-05.
16 PLC cycle complete
When simple PLC completes one cy cle, the terminal outputs a pulse
signal with width of 250ms.
17
Frequency-level detection
FDT1 output
Refer to the descriptions of b4-22 and b4-23.
18
Frequency level detection
FDT2 output
Refer to the descriptions of b4-24 and b4-25.
19 Frequency reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-26.
20 Frequency 1 reached Refer to the descrip tions of b4-27 and b4-28.
21 Frequency 2 reached Refer to the descrip tions of b4-29 and b4-30.
22 Cu rrent 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-35 and b4-36.
23 Cu rrent 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-37 and b4-38.
24
Module temperature
reached
If the heatsink temperature of the inverter module (b9-07) reaches the
set module temperature threshold (b4-39 ), the terminal becomes ON.
25 Timing reached
If the timing function (b2-28) is valid, the terminal becomes ON after
the present running time of the frequency in verter reaches the set time.
26 Zero current state Refer to the descriptions of b4-24 and b4-25.
27
Output current limit
exceeded
Refer to the descriptions of b4-33 and b4-34.
28
Lower voltage state
output
If the frequency inverter is in lower vo ltage state, the terminal
becomes ON.
29
Frequency inverter
overload pre-warning
The frequency inverter judges whether the motor load exceeds the
overload pre-warning threshold before performing the protection
action. If the pre-warning threshold is exce eded, the terminal becomes
ON. For motor overload parameters, see the descriptions of bb-01 to
bb-03.
30 Motor overheat warning
If the motor temperature reaches the temp erature set in bb-27 (Motor
overheat warning threshold), the terminal be comes ON. You can view
the motor temperature by using U 0-33.
31
Motor overload
pre-warning
The frequency inverter judges motor overload according to preset
motor overload threshold, and terminal bec omes ON. The overload
threshold setting refer to bb-01~bb-03.
32 Off load If the load becomes 0, the ter minal becomes ON.
33 AI1 larger than AI2
When the input of AI1 is larger than the input of AI2, the terminal
becomes ON.
34 AI1 input limit exceeded
If AI1 input is larger than the value of b5-0 6 (AI1 input voltage upper
limit) or lower than the value o f b5-05 (AI1 input voltage lower limit),
the terminal becomes ON.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
63
Value Function Description
35 Alarm output (all faults)
If a fault occurs on the frequency inverter and the frequency inverter
continues to run, the terminal o utputs the alarm signal.
36
This time running time
reached
If the current running time of frequency inverter ex ceeds the value of
b2-31, the terminal becomes ON.
37
Accumulative power- on
time reached
If the frequency inverter accumulative power-on tim e (b9-08) exceeds
the value set in b2-20, the termin al becomes ON.
38
Accumulative running
time reached
If the accumulative running time of the frequency inve rter exceeds the
time set in b2-21, the terminal becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-10 FMR ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b4-11
FMR OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b4-12 Relay 1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b4-13
Relay 1 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b4-14
Reserved
b4-15
Reserved
b4-16 DO1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b4-17
DO1 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
b4-18 DO2 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b4-19
DO2 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to set the de lay time of output terminals FMR, relay, DO1, DO2 and DO3 from
status change to actual output.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-20 DO logic selection 1
Unit's digit: FMR valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: Relay 1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: Relay 2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: DO2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
00000
It is used to set the logic of output terminals FMR, relay, DO1 and DO2.
0: Positive logic
The output terminal is valid when being connected with COM, and invalid when being disconnected from
COM.
1: Positive logic
The output terminal is invalid when being connected with COM, and valid when being disconnected from
COM.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-22
Frequency detection value
(FDT1)
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz
b4-23
Frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT hysteresis 1)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level) 5.0%
If the running frequency is higher than the value of b4-22, the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON. If
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
64
the running frequency is lower than value of b4-22, the DO terminal goes OFF.
These two parameters are respectively used to set the detection value of output frequency and hysteresis
value of cancellation of the output. The value of b4-23 is a percentage of the hysteresis frequency to the
frequency detection value (b4-22). The FDT function is shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-14 FDT level
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-24
Frequency detection value
(FDT2)
0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz
b4-25
Frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT hysteresis 2)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 level) 5.0%
The frequency detection function is the same a s FDT1 function. For details, refer to the descriptions of b4-22
and b4-23.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-26
Detection amplitude of
frequency reached
0.00~100% (maximum frequency) 3.0%
If the frequency inverter running frequency is within the certain range of the set frequency, the
corresponding DO terminal becomes ON.
This parameter is used to set t he range within which the output frequency is det ected to reach the set
frequency. The value of this parameter is a perce ntage relative to the maximum frequency. The detection
range of frequency reached is shown in the f ollowing figure.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
65
Diagram 5-15 Detection range of frequency reached
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-27
Any frequency reaching
detection value 1
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz
b4-28
Any frequency reaching
detection amplitude 1
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 3.0%
b4-29
Any frequency reaching
detection value 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz
b4-30
Any frequency reaching
detection amplitude 2
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 3.0%
If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is wi thin the positive and negative amplitudes of the any
frequency reaching detection value, the corresponding DO becomes ON.
The EM11 provides two groups of any frequency reaching detection par ameters, including frequency
detection value and detection amplitude, as shown in the following figure.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
66
Diagram 5-16 Any frequency reach ing detection
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-31 Zero current detectio n level 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 5.0%
b4-32
Zero current detection delay
time
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s
If the output current of the frequency inverter is equal to or less than the zero current detection level and the
duration exceeds the zero current dete ction delay time, the corresponding DO becomes ON. The zero current
detection is shown in the follow ing figure.
Diagram 5-17 Zero current detection
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-33 Ove r current output threshold 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 200.0%
b4-34
Over current output detection
delay time
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s
If the output current of the frequency in verter is equal to or higher than the over current threshold and the
duration exceeds the detection delay time, th e corresponding DO becomes ON. The output over current
detection function is shown in th e following figure.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
67
Diagram 5-18 Output over current detectio n
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-35 Any current reaching 1 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 100.0%
b4-36
amplitude of any current
reaching 1
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 3.0%
b4-37 Any current reaching 2 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 100.0%
b4-38
Amplitude of any current
reaching 2
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 3.0%
If the output current of the frequency inverter is within the positiv e and negative amplitudes of any current
reaching detection value, the corresponding DO beco mes ON.
The EM11 provides two groups of any current reaching detection parameters, including current detectio n
value and detection amplitudes, as shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-19 Any current reaching detection
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-39 Module temperature thre shold 25~100°C 75°C
When the heatsink temperature of the frequency inverter reaches the value of this parameter, the
corresponding DO becomes ON, indicatin g that the IGBT module temperature reaches the threshold.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
68
5.6 Group b5: Pulse/Analog input terminals
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b5-00 Pulse minimum input(HDI) 0.00 kHz ~b5-02 0.00 kHz
b5-01
Corresponding setting of pulse
minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 0.00%
b5-02 Pulse maximum input b5-00 ~ 50.00 kHz 50.00 kHz
b5-03
Corresponding setting of pulse
maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 100.0%
b5-04 Pulse filter time 0.00s~10.00s 10.00s
Can only be input by DI6. The method of setting this function is similar to that of setting AI1 function ..
Diagram 5-20 The relationship between pulse input and setting value
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b5-05
AI1 input voltage lower limit
of protection
0.00 V~ b5-06
3.10 V
b5-06
AI1 input voltage upper limit
of protection
b5-05~10.00 V
6.80 V
These two parameters are used to set the limits of the input voltage to provide protection on the frequency
inverter. When the AI1 input is larger than the value of b5-06 or smaller than the value of b5-05, the
corresponding DO becomes ON, indicating that AI1 input exceeds the limit. Every analog input has five
setting points to facilitate the setting of the AI curve.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b5-07
AI1input minimum value
0.00 V ~ b5-15
0.00 V
b5-08
Corresponding setting of AI1
minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.0%
b5-09
Second point input value of
AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
2.50V
b5-10
Corresponding setting of
second point input value of
AI1
-100.0% ~100.0%
25.0%
b5-11
Third point input value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
5.00V
b5-12
Corresponding setting of third
point input value of AI1
-100.0% ~100.0%
50.0%
b5-13
Fourth point input value of
AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
7.50V
b5-14
Corresponding setting of
-100.0% ~100.0%
75.0%
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
69
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
fourth point input value of AI1
b5-15
AI1 input maximum value
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
10.00 V
b5-16
Corresponding setting of AI1
maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
100.0%
b5-17
AI1input filter time
0.00s~10.00s
0.10s
These parameters are used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage and the correspon ding
setting value.
When the analog input is current input, 1 mA curren t corresponds to 0.5 Volts.
Diagram 5-21 Corresponding rela tionship between analog input and setting values
b5-17 (AI1 filter time) is use d to set the software filter time of AI1. If the a nalog input is liable to
interference, increase the value of this parameter to stabilize the detected analog input. Howe ver, increase of
the AI filter time will slow down the respo nse of analog detection. Set this parameter properly based on
actual conditions.
In different applications, 100% of analo g input corresponds to different nominal values. For details, refer to
the description of different applications.
For the setting method of AI curve 2 and AI cure 3, please refer to AI curve 1.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b5-18
Jump point of AI1 input
corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.0%
b5-19
Jump amplitude of AI1input
corresponding setting
0.0%~100.0%
0.5%
b5-20
AI2 minimum input
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
0.00 V
b5-21
Corresponding setting of AI2
minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.0%
b5-22
Second point input value of
AI2
0.00 V ~10.00 V
2.50V
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
70
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b5-23
Corresponding setting of
second point input value of
AI2
-100.00% ~100.0%
25.0%
b5-24
Third point input value of AI2
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
5.00V
b5-25
Corresponding setting of third
point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0%
50.0%
b5-26
Fourth point input value of
AI2
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
7.50V
b5-27
Corresponding setting of
fourth point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0%
75.0%
b5-28
AI2 maximum input
0.00V~ 10.00 V
10.00 V
b5-29
Corresponding setting of AI2
maximum input
-100.00%~100.0%
100.0%
b5-30
AI2 input filter time
0.00s~10.00s
0.10s
b5-31
Jump point of AI2 input
corresponding setting
-100.0%~100.0%
0.0%
b5-32
Jump amplitude of AI2 input
corresponding setting
0.0% ~100.0%
0.5%
b5-33
AI3 minimum input
0.00 V~10.00 V
0.00 V
b5-34
Corresponding setting of AI3
minimum input
-100.00%~100.0%
0.0%
b5-35
Second point input value of
AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
2.50V
b5-36
Corresponding setting of
second point input value of
AI3
-100.00% ~100.0%
25.0%
b5-37
Third point input value of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
5.00V
b5-38
Corresponding setting of third
point input value of AI3
-100.00% ~100.0%
50.0%
b5-39
Fourth point input value of
AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
7.50V
b5-40
Corresponding setting of
fourth point
-100.00% ~100.0%
75.0%
b5-41
AI3 maximum input
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
10.00 V
b5-42
Corresponding setting of AI3
maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
100.0%
b5-43
AI3 filter time
0.00~10.00s
0.10s
b5-44
Jump point of AI3 input
corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.0%
b5-45
Jump amplitude of AI3 input
corresponding setting
0.0% ~100.0%
0.5%
The AI terminals (AI1 to AI3) of EM11 all support the co rresponding setting jump function, which fixes the
AI input corresponding setting at th e jump point when AI input corresponding setting jumps around the
jump range.
For example:
AI1 input voltage fluctuation around 5.00V and the amplitude range is 4.90V~5.10V. AI1 minimu m input
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
71
0.00V corresponds to 0.00% and maximum input 10.00V corresponds to 100.0%。 The detected AI1 input
corresponding setting varies between 49.0% and 51 .0%.
If you set jump point b5-18 to 50.0% and jump amplitude b5-19 to 1.0%, then freque ncy inverter obtained
AI1 input corresponding setting is fixed to 50.0% , eliminating the fluctuation effect.
5.7 Group b6: Pulse/analog output terminals
Code Parameter Name Default
b6-00 FM P function selection
0
b6-01 AO1 ou tput function selection
0
b6-02 AO2 ou tput function selection
1
The output pulse frequency of the FMP terminal r anges from 0.01 kHz to "Maximum FMP output
frequency" (b6-03). The value of b6-03 is between 0.01 kHz and 100.00 kHz.
The output range of AO1 and AO2 is 0V~10 V or 0mA~20mA. The relationship between pulse and analog
output ranges and corresponding f unctions is listed in the following table.
Value Function
Range (Corresponding to Pulse or Analog Output Range
0.0%~100.0%)
0 Running frequency 0Hz~ maximum frequency
1
Setting frequency 0Hz~ maximum frequency
2
Output current 0 ~2 times of rated motor current
3
Output torque (absolute
value)
0~ 2 times of rated motor torque(absolute value of torque)
4
Output power 0 ~2 times of rated power
5
Output voltage 0 ~1.2 times of rated frequency inverter DC bus voltage
6
Motor rotational speed 0~rotational speed corresponding to maximum frequency
7
Output current 0.0A~1000.0 A
8
Output voltage 0.0V~000.0 V
9
Output torque (actual
value)
-200% of rated motor torque~ 200% of rated motor torque
10
Pulse input 0.01 kHz ~100.00 kHz
11
AI1 0V~10 V
12 AI2 0 V~10 V
13
AI3 0V~10 V
14
Length 0~ maximum set length
15
Count value 0 ~ maximum count value
16
Communication setting 0~32767
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b6-03
Maximum FMP output
frequency
0.01 kHz ~50.00 kHz
50.00 kHz
If the FM terminal is used for pulse ou tput, this parameter is used to set the maximum frequency of pu lse
output.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b6-04
AO1 offset coefficient
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.0%
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
72
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b6-05
AO1 gain
-10.00~10.00
1.00
b6-06
AO2 offset coefficient
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.00%
b6-07
AO2 gain
-10.00 ~10.00
1.00
These parameters are used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the output amplitude deviation. They
can also be used to define the desired AO curve. If "b" represents zero offset, "k" rep resents gain, "Y"
represents actual output, and "X" re presents standard output, the actual output is: Y = kX + b.
The zero offset coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard outp ut
refers to the value correspondi ng to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to 20 mA) with no ze ro offset or
gain adjustment.
For example, if the analog output is used as the running freq uency, and it is expected that the output is 8 V
when the frequency is 0 and 3 V at the maximum fr equency, the gain shall be set to -0.50, and the zero offset
shall be set to 80%.
5.8 Group b7: Virtual digital input (VDI)/digital output (VDO) terminals
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b7-00 VDI1 function selection 0~49
0
b7-01 VDI2 function selection 0~49
0
b7-02 VDI3 function selection 0~49
0
b7-03 VDI4 function selection 0~49
0
b7-04 VDI5 function selection 0~49
0
VDI1~ VDI5 have the same functio ns as DI terminals on the control board and can be used for digital inpu t.
For more details, see description of b3-00 ~ b3-11.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b7-05 VDI state setting mode
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Valid decided by state of VDOx
1: Valid decided by b7-06
Ten's digit: VDI2.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
00000
b7-06 VDI state setting
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: VDI2
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
00000
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
73
Different from DI terminals, VDI state can be set in two modes, selected in b7-05:
For example 1:Decided by state of VDOx
Whether the state of VDI is valid or not, that is determine d by the state of the corresponding VDO. VDI x is
uniquely bound to VDO x (x is one of 1~5). For ex ample, to implement the function that the frequency
inverter reports an alarm and stops when the AI1 input exceeds the limit, perform the following setting:
1. S et VDI1 with function 44 "User-defined fault 1" (b7-00 = 44).
2. VDI1 terminal valid is decided by state of VDO1 (b7-05= xxx0).
3. S et VDO1 with function "AI1 input limit exceeded" (b7-11 = 31).
When the AI1 input exceeds the l imit, VDO1 becomes ON. At this moment, VDI1 becomes ON and the
frequency inverter receives you-defined fault 1. Then the frequency inverter reports Err27 and stops.
Exa mple 2: Decided by b7-06
The VDI state is determined by b7-06. For example, to implement the fu nction that the frequency inverter
automatically enters the running s tate after power-on, perform the following setting:
1. Set VDI1 with function 1 "Forward RUN (FWD)" (b7-00 = 1).
2. S et b7-05 to xxx1: The state of VDI1 is decided by b7-0 6.
3. S et b7-06 to xxx1: VDI1 is valid.
4. S et b0-02 to 1: The command source to terminal control.
5. S et b2-32 to 0: Startup protection is not en abled.
When the frequency inverter completes initialization after power-on, it detects that VDI1 is valid a nd VDI1
is set with the function of forward RU N. That is, the frequency inverter receives the forward RUN command
from the terminal. Therefore, the frequency inverter starts to run in forward direction.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b7-07
Function selection for AI1
used as DI
0~49
0
b7-08
Function selection for AI2
used as DI
0~49
0
b7-09
Function selection for AI3
used as DI
0~49
0
b7-10
Valid state selection for AI
used as DI
Unit's digit: AI1.
0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
Ten's digit: AI2.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: AI3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
0
The functions of these parameters are to use AI as DI. When AI is used as DI, the AI stat e is high level if the
AI input voltage is 7 V or higher and is low level if the AI input voltage is 3 V or lower.
If the AI input voltage is between 3 V and 7 V, the AI state is hysteresis. And then b7-10 is used to
determine whether high level valid or low level valid when AI is used as DI.
The setting of AI (used as DI) function is the same as that of DI. For details, see the descriptions of DI
setting.
The following figure takes AI input voltag e as an example to describe the relationship between AI input
voltage and corresponding DI state.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
74
Diagram 6-22 Relationship of AI input voltage and corresponding DI status
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b7-11 VDO1 function selection
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
38
b7-12 VDO2 function selection
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
38
b7-13 VDO3 function selection
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
38
b7-14 VDO4 function selection
0:connect with physical Dix interna lly
1~38
38
b7-15 VDO5 function selection
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
38
b7-16 VDO1 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b7-17 VDO2 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b7-18 VDO3 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b7-19 VDO4 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b7-20 VDO5 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s
b7-21 VDO valid state selection
Unit's digit: VDO1.
0: Positive logic valid
1: Reverse logic valid
Ten's digit: VDO2
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: VDO3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Thousand's digit: VDO4.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Ten thousand's digit: VDO5.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
00000
VDO functions are similar to the DO functions on the control board. The VDO can be used together with
VDI x to implement some simple lo gic control.
If VDO function is set to 0, the state of VDO1 to VDO5 is determined by the state of DI1 to DI5 on the
control board. In this case, VDOx and DIx are one-to-one mapping relationship.
If VDO function is set to non-0, the function setting and use of VDOx are the same as DO in group b4.
The VDOx state valid can be set in b7-21. The applicatio n examples of VDIx involved the usage of VDOx,
and please see these examples for your refe rence.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
75
5.9 Group b8: AI/AO Correction
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b8-00
Ideal voltage of AI1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-01
Sampling voltage of AI1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-02
Ideal voltage of AI1
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-03
Sampling voltage of AI1
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-04
Ideal voltage of AI2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-05
Sampling voltage of AI2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-06
Ideal voltage of AI2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-07
Sampling voltage of AI2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-08
Ideal voltage of AI3
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-09
Sampling voltage of AI3
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-10
Ideal voltage of AI3
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-11
Sampling voltage of AI3
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
These parameters are used to correct the AI to el iminate the impact of AI zero offset and gain.
They have been corrected of delivery. When you resume the factory v alues, these parameters will be
restored to the factory-corrected values. Generally, you need not perform correction in the applications.
Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter.
Displayed voltage indicates the voltage display value sampled by the frequency inverter. For details, refer to
the voltage displayed before AI correction in group U0.
During correction, send two voltage values to each AI terminal, and save the measured values and displayed
values to the function codes b8-00 to b8-11. Then the frequency inverter will automatically perform AI zero
offset and gain correction.
If the input voltage and the actual voltage sampled by the HC drive are inconsistent, perform correction on
site. Take AI1 as an example. The on-site corre ction is as follows:
1. Send a voltage signal (approximately 2 V) to AI1.
2. M easure the AI1 voltage and save it to b8-00.
3. View the displayed value of U0-21 and save the value to b8-01.
4. Send a voltage signal (approximately 8 V) to AI1.
5. Measure AI1 voltage and save it to b8-02.
6. View the displayed value of U0-21 and save the value to b8-03.
At correction of AI2 and AI3, the actua lly sampled voltage is respectively queried in U0-22 and U0-23.
For AI1 and AI2, 2 V and 8 V are suggested as the correction voltages. For AI3, -8 V and 8V are suggested.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
76
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b8-12
Ideal voltage of AO1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-13
Measured voltage of AO1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-14
Ideal voltage of AO1
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-15
Measured voltage of
AO1calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-16
Ideal voltage of AO2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-17
Measured voltage of AO2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
2.000V
b8-18
Ideal voltage of AO2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
b8-19
Measured voltage of AO2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
8.000V
These parameters are used to correct the AO.
They have been corrected of delivery. When you store the factory default values, these parameters will be
restored to the factory-corrected values. Generally you needn’t perform correction in the applications.
Ideal target voltage indicates the theoretical output voltage of the frequency inverter. Measured voltage
indicates the actual output voltag e value measured by instruments such as the multimeter.
5.10 Group b9: Operation Panel and Display
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-00
STOP/RESET key function
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in
operation panel control
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any
operation mode
0
b9-01
MF.K Key function selection
0: MF.K key disabled
1: Switchover between operation panel
control and remote command contro l
(terminal or communication)
2: Switchover between forward rotation and
reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
0
MF.K key refers to multifunctional key. You can set the function of the MF.K key by using this parameter.
You can perform switchover by using this key both in stop or running state.
0: MF.K key disabled
This key is disabled.
1: Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control (terminal or
communication)
You can perform switchover from the present command source to the op eration panel control (local
operation). If the present command source is operatio n panel control, this key is invalid.
2: Switchover between forward rotation and reverse r otation
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
77
You can change the direction of the frequency inverter running by using the MF.K key. It is valid only when
the present command source is operat ion panel control.
3: Forward JOG
You can perform forward JOG (FJOG) by using the MF.K key.
4: Reverse JOG
You can perform reverse JOG (FJOG) by using the MF.K ke y.
Code Parame ter Name Setting Range Default
b9-02
LED display running
parameters 1
0000~FFFF:
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the
running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set b9-02
to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
0x1f
b9-03
LED display running
parameters 2
0000~FFFF:
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the
running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set b9-03
to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
0x0800
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
78
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-03
LED display running
parameters 2
0x0800
These two parameters are used to set the mon itoring parameters that can be viewed when the frequency
inverter is in the running state. You can view a maximum of 32 running state. The displaying sequence is
displayed from the lowest bit of b9-02.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
b9-04
LED display
parameter of
stopping
0000~FFFF:
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running,
set the corresponding bit to 1, a nd set b9-04 to the
hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
0x2033
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
b9-05
Load speed display
coefficient
0.0001~ 6.5000
1.0000
This parameter is used to adjust the relationship between the ou tput frequency of frequency inverter and the
load speed. For details, see the description of b9-06.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
79
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-06
Number of decimal
places for load
speed display
0: 0 decimal display
1: 1 decimal display
2: 2 decimal display
3: 3 decimal display
1
b9-06 is used to set the number of decimal places for load speed display. The following give s an example to
explain how to calculate the load speed:
Assume that b9-05 (Load speed display coefficient) is 2.000 and b9-06 is 2 (2 decimal plac es). When the
running frequency of the frequency inverter is 40.00 Hz, the load speed is 40.00 x 2.000 = 80.00 (display of
2 decimal places).
If the frequency inverter is in the stop state, the load speed is the speed corresponding to the set frequency,
namely, "setting load speed". If the set frequency is 50.00 Hz, the load spee d in the stop state is 50.00 x
2.000 = 100.00 (display of 2 decimal places).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-07
Heatsink
temperature
0.0°C ~100.0°C
0°C
It is used to display the temperature of heatsink.
Different inverter model has differ ent temperature value for over-temperature protection.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-08
Accumulative
power-on time
0~65535 h
0 h
It is used to display the accumulative power-on time of the frequency inverter since the delivery. If the time
reaches the set power-on time (b2-21), the term inal with the digital output function 24 becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-09
Accumulative
running time
0~65535 h
0 h
It is used to display the accumulative running time of the f requency inverter. After the accu mulative running
time reaches the value set in b2-21, the terminal with the digital output function 12 becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-10
Accumulative power
consumption
0~65535 kWh
0 kWh
It is used to display the accumulative power consumption of the frequency inverter until no w.
5.11 Group bA: Communication parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-00
Communication
type selection
0: Modbus protocol 0
The EM11 now supports Modbus, later will add the comm unication protocol such as PROFIBUS-DP and
CANopen. For details, see the description of “EM11 communic ation protocol”.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
80
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bA-01 Baud ratio setting
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
7: 38400 BPS
5
This parameter is used to set the data transfe r baud rate from host computer to frequency inverter. Please
note that baud rate of the host computer an d the inverter should be consistent. Otherwise, the communication
is impossible. The higher the ba ud rate is, the faster the communication is.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bA-02
Modbus Data format
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
0
The host computer and inverter setup data format must be consis tent, otherwise, communication is
impossible.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bA-03
Broadcast address
1~249 (0: Broadcast address) Valid for Modbus
0
When the local address is set to 0, tha t is, broadcast address, it can realize the broadcast function of ho st
computer.
The address is unique; it is base of point to point c ommunication between host computer and frequency
inverter.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bA-04
Modbus response
delay
0~20 ms (Only valid for Modbus)
2 ms
Response delay: it refers to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to response data back
to the host machine. If the response delay is less than the system processing time, then the respo nse time is
based on the time of the system processing. If the response delaying time is more than the system processing
time, after the system processes the dat a, it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is reached,
and then sending back data to host machine.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bA-05
Communication
timeout
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus
0.0s
When this parameter is set to 0 .0s, the communication interface timeout function is invalid .
When the function code is set to a va lue, if the interval time between this communication and the next
communication is beyond the c ommunication timeout, the system will report communicat ion failure error
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
81
(Err16). At normal application, it will be set as invalid. If in the continuous communication system, se tting
this parameter, you can monitor the communica tion status.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-06
Modbus protocol
data transmission
format selection
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol
1
bA-06=1: Select standard Modbus protocol.
bA-06=0: When reading the command, the slave machin e return is one byte more than the standard Modbus
protocol’s, for details, refer to communication data structure of appendix .
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-07
Communication
reading current
resolution
0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
0
It is used to confirm the unit of current value when th e communication reads the output current.
5.12 Group bb: Fault and Protection
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-00
G/P type selection
0: P type
1: G type
1
This parameter is used to display the delivered mod el and cannot be modified.
0: Applicable to variable torque load (fan and pu mp) with rated parameters specified.
1: Applicable to constant torque general load with rated parameters specified.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-01
Motor overload
protection selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
bb-02
Motor overload
protection gain
0.20~10.00
1.00
bb-01 =0
The motor overload protective function is disabled. The moto r is exposed to potential damage due to
overheating. A thermal relay is suggested to be installed between the frequency inverter and the motor.
bb-01 = 1
The frequency inverter judges whether the motor is overloaded accor ding to the inverse time-lag curve of the
motor overload protection.
The inverse time-lag curve of the motor overload protection is:
220% × (bb-02) × rated motor current
(if the load remains at this valu e for one minute, the frequency inverter reports motor overlo ad fault), or
150% × (bb-02) ×rated motor current
(if the load remains at this value for 60 minutes, the frequency inverter repor ts motor overload fault).
Set bb-02 properly based on the ac tual overload capacity. If the value of bb-02 is set t oo large, may result in
damaging to the motor because the motor overheats but the frequency inverter does not report the alarm.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
82
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bb-03
Motor overload
pre-warning
coefficient
50%~100%
80%
This function is used to give a warning sign al to the control system via DO before motor overload protection.
This parameter is used to determin e the percentage, at which pre- warning is performed before moto r
overload. The larger the value is, the less advance the pre-warning will be.
When the output current of the frequency inverter is gr eater than the value of the overload inverse time-lag
curve multiplied by bb-03, the DO terminal of the frequency inverter set with motor ove rload pre-warning
becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bb-04
Overvoltage stall
gain
0~100
0
bb-05
Overvoltage stall
protective voltage
120%~150%
130%
When the DC bus voltage exceeds the value of bb-05 (Overvoltage stall protective voltage) during
deceleration of the frequency inverter, the frequency inverter stops deceleration and keeps the present
running frequency. After the bus volta ge declines, the frequency inverter continues to decelerate.
bb-04 (Overvoltage stall gain) is used to adjust the overvoltage suppression capacity of the frequency
inverter. The larger the value is, the greater the overvoltage suppression capacity will be. In the prerequisite
of no overvoltage occurrence, set bb-04 to a sma ll value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the system dynamic response will be slow. For
large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the suppression result will be poor and an
overvoltage fault may occur.
If the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0, the overvoltage stall function is disable d. The overvoltage stall
protective voltage setting 100% co rresponds to the base values in the following table:
Voltage Class Corresponding Base Value
Single-phase 220 V 290 V
Three-phase 220 V 290 V
Three-phase 380 V 530 V
Three-phase 480 V 620 V
Three-phase 690 V 880 V
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bb-06
Over current stall
gain
0~100
20
bb-07
Over current stall
protective current
100%~200%
150%
Over current stall: When the output current exceeds th e over current stall protective current (bb-07) during
acceleration/deceleration of the frequency inverte r, the frequency inverter stops acceleration/deceleration
and keeps the present running frequency. After the output current declin es to below bb-07, the frequency
inverter continues to accelerate/decelerate.
bb-07 (over current stall protective current) is used to select the current protection value of over current stall
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
83
function. This function will be carried out by frequency inverter, when the current exceeds bb-07. This value
is the percentage of motor rated cu rrent.
bb-06 (over current stall gain) is used to adj ust the over current suppression capacity of the frequency
inverter. The larger the value is, the greater the over current sup pression capacity will be. In condition of no
over current occurrence, should set bb-0 6 to a small value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the system dynamic response will be slow. For
large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the suppression result will be poor and over cur rent
fault may occur. If the over current stall gain is set to 0, the over current stall function is d isabled.
Diagram 5-23 Diagram of the over current stall protection function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-08
Protection of
short-circuit to ground
after power-on
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
It is used to determine whether to check the motor is short-circuited to ground after power-on of the
frequency inverter. If this function is enabled, the frequency inverter's UVW will have voltage output a
while after power-on.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-09
Fault auto reset times
0~99
0
It is used to set the times of fault auto resets if this function is used. After the value is exceeded, the
frequency inverter will remain in the fault state.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-10
Relay action
selection during
fault auto reset
0: Not act
1: Act
0
It is used to decide whether DO acts during the fault auto reset if the fault auto reset function is used.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
84
Code Parameter Name Setting Range De fault
bb-11
Time interval of
fault auto reset
0.1s~100.0s
1.0s
It is used to set the waiting time from the frequ ency inverter alarm to fault auto reset.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-12
Input phase loss
protection/contactor
energizing
protection selection
Unit's digit: Input phase loss protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Ten's digit: Contactor energizing protection
0,1( same as Unit’s digit)
0
It is used to determine whether to perform input phase loss or contactor energizing protection.
The EM11 models that provide this function are listed in the following table.
Voltage Class Models
Single-phase 220 V None
Three-phase 220 V From 11 kW G model
Three-phase 380 V From 18.5 kW G model
Three-phase 690 V From 18.5 kW G model
For every voltage class, the EM11 frequenc y inverters provide function of input phase loss or contactor
energizing protection for above model. The E M11 Frequency inverters do not have this function below the
power listed in the table no matt er whether bb-12 is set to 0 or 1.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-13
Output phase loss
protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
It is used to determine whether to perform output phase loss protection.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-14
Off load protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
bb-15
Off load detection
level
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
1.0%
bb-16
Off load detection
time
0.0s~60.0s
1.0s
If off load protection is enabled, w hen the output current of the frequency inverter is lower than the detec tion
level (bb-15) and the duration time exceed s the detection time (bb-16), the output frequency of frequency
inverter automatically declines to 7% of the rated frequency. During the p rotection, the frequency inverter
automatically accelerates to the set frequency if the load restore to normal.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-17
Over-speed detection
value
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency)
20.0%
bb-18
Over-speed detection
time
0.0s~60.0s
1.0s
This function is valid only wh en the frequency inverter runs in the VC+PG mode.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
85
If the actual motor rotational speed detected by the frequency in verter exceeded the maximum frequency and
the excessive value is greater than th e value of bb-17 and the lasting time exceeded the value of bb-18, the
frequency inverter reports Err4 3 and acts according to the selected fault protection action.
If the bb-18(over-speed detection time) is 0.0s, the over-speed detection function is disabled.
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-19
Detection value of
too large speed
deviation
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency)
20.0%
bb-20
Detection time of too
large speed deviation
0.0s~60.0s
5.0s
This function is valid only wh en the frequency inverter runs in the VC+PG mode.
If the frequency inverter detects the deviation ove r than bb-19 between the actual motor rotational and the
setting motor frequency, and the duration time exceeds the value of bb-20, the frequency inverter reports
Err42 and act according to the selected fault pr otection action.
If bb-20 (Detection time of too large speed deviation) is 0.0s, this function is disabled.
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-21
Action selection at
instantaneous power
failure
0: Invalid
1: Decelerate
2: Decelerate to stop
0
bb-22
Voltage rally
judging time at
instantaneous power
failure
0.00s ~100.00s
0.00s
bb-23
Judging voltage of
instantaneous power
failure
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)
80.0%
bb-24
Judging voltage of
instantaneous power
failure restoring
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)
90.0%
Of instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the DC bus voltage of the Frequency inverter reduces.
This function enables the Frequency inverter to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with the load
feedback energy by reducing the output frequency so as to keep the Frequency inverter running
continuously.
If bb-21 = 1, when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the frequency inverter decelerates
until DC bus voltage restore to normal, the frequency inverter accelerates to the set frequency. If the DC
bus voltage remains normal for the time exceeding the value set in bb-22, it is considered that the DC
bus voltage restores to normal.
If bb-21 = 2, when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the frequency inverter decelerates
to stop.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
86
Diagram 5-24 Frequency inverter action diagram of instantaneous power failure
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-25
Type of motor
temperature sensor
0: No temperature sensor
1: PT100
2: PT1000
0
bb-26
Motor overheat
protection threshold
0°C~200°C
120°C
bb-27
Motor overheat
pre-warning
threshold
0°C~200°C
100°C
The signal of the motor temperature sensor need s to be connected to the optional I/O extension card. This
card is an optional component. PG card also can be used for the temperature signal input with motor
over-temperature protection function. Please contact with manufacturer or distributors.
The PG card interface of the EM11 supports both PT10 0 and PT1000. Set the sensor type correctly during
the use. You can view the motor temperature via pa rameter U0-34.
If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in bb-26, the frequency inverter reports an alarm and acts
according to the selected fault protection action.
If the motor temperature exceeds the valu e set in bb-27, the DO terminal of frequency inverter set with
motor overheat warning becomes ON.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
87
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-28
Overvoltage
threshold
200.0~2500.0 V
830.0 V
It is used to set the overvoltage threshold of the frequency inverter. The default values of different voltage
classes are listed in the following table.
Voltage Class
Default Overvoltage
Threshold
Single-phase 220 V 400.0 V
Three-phase 220 V 400.0 V
Three-phase 380 V 830.0 V
Three-phase 480 V 890.0 V
Three-phase 690 V 1300.0 V
Note: The default va lue is also the upper limit of the frequency inverter's internal overvoltage protection
voltage. The parameter becomes effective only when the setting of bb-28 is lower than the default value. If
the setting is higher than the default value, use the default value.
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-29
Under voltage
threshold
50.0%~150.0%
100.0%
It is used to set the under voltage threshold of Err09. The under voltage threshold 100% of the frequency
inverter of different voltage classes corresponds to different nominal values, as listed in the following table.
Voltage Class
Nominal Value of under
voltage threshold
Single-phase 220 V 200 V
Three-phase 220 V 200 V
Three-phase 380 V 350 V
Three-phase 480 V 450 V
Three-phase 690 V 650 V
Three-phase 1140V 1350V
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-30
Brake unit use ratio
0%~100%
100%
It is valid only for the frequency inver ter with internal braking unit and used to adjust the duty ratio of the
braking unit. The larger the value of this param eter is, the better the braking result will be. However, too
larger value causes great fluctuation o f DC bus voltage during the braking process.
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-31
Rapid current limit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
The rapid current limit function can reduce the frequency inverter over current faults at maximum,
guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the frequency inverter.
However, long-time rapid current limit may cause the frequency inverter to overheat, which is not allowed.
In this case, the frequency inverter wi ll report Err40, indicating the frequency inverter is overloade d and
needs to stop.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
88
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-32
Fault protection
action selection 1
Unit's digit: Motor overload, Err11.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten's digit: Power input phase loss, Err12.
Same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Power output phase loss, Err13.
Same as unit's digit
Thousand's digit: External equipment fault, Err15.
Same as unit's digit
Ten thousand's digit: Communication fault, Err16.
Same as unit's digit
00000
bb-33
Fault protection
action selection 2
Unit's digit: Encoder/PG card fault, Err20.
0: Free stop
Ten's digit: EEPROM read-write fault, Err21.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
Hundred's digit : Reserved
Thousand's digit: Motor Overheat, Err25.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten thousand's digit: Running time reached, Err26.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000
bb-34
Fault protection
action selection 3
Unit's digit: User-defined fault 1,Err27.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: User-defined fault 2,Err28.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Accumulative power-on time
reached,Err29.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Thousand's digit: Off load, Err30.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: reduce to 7% of rated motor frequency and continue
running. If the load recovers a nd it will auto regain to
setting frequency.
Ten thousand's digit: PID feedback lost during running,
Err31.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000
bb-35
Fault protection
action selection 4
Unit's digit: Speed deviation too large, Err42
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: Motor over-speed, Err43.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Initial position fault, Err51.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000
If "fre e stop" is selected, the frequency inverter displays Err** and directly stops.
If "S top according to the stop mode" is selected, the frequency inve rter displays A** and stops according
to the stop mode. After stop, the frequency inverter displays Err**.
If "Co ntinue to run" is selected, the frequency inverter continues to run and displays A**. The running
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
89
frequency is set in bb-36.
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-36
Frequency selection
for continuing to run
of fault
0: Current running frequency
1: Set frequency
2: Frequency upper limit
3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency of abnormality (bb-37)
0
bb-37
Backup frequency of
abnormality
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 1.0%
If a fault occurs during the running of the frequency inverter and the handling of fault is set to "continue to
run", the frequency inverter displays A** and continues to run at the frequency set in bb-36.
The setting of bb-37 is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency.
5.13 Group bC: Fault detection Parameters
Code Par ameter Name Setting Range
bC-00 1st fault type 0~99
bC-01 2nd fault type 0~99
bC-02 3rd fault type (latest) 0~99
It is used to record the types of the mos t recent three faults of the frequency inverter. 0 indicates no fault. For
possible causes and solution of each f ault, refer to Chapter 8.
Code Parameter Name Description
bC-03
Frequency of latest
fault
It displays the frequency when the latest fault occurs.
bC-04
Current of latest
fault
It displays the current when the latest fault occurs.
bC-05
DC Bus voltage of
latest fault
It displays the DC bus voltage when the latest fault occurs.
bC-06
Input terminals
status of latest fault
It displays the status of all DI terminals when the latest fault occurs.
The sequence is as follows:
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
If a DI is ON, the setting is 1. If the DI is OFF, the setting is 0. The
value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI status.
bC-07
Output terminal
status of latest fault
It displays the status of all output terminals when the latest fault
occurs. The sequence is as follows:
BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DO2 DO1 REL2 REL1 FMP
If an output terminal is ON, the setting is 1. If the output terminal is
OFF, the setting is 0. The value is the equivalent decimal number
converted from the DI statuses.
bC-08
Frequency inverter
status of latest fault
Reserved
bC-09
Power-on time of
latest fault
It displays the present power-on time when the latest fault occurs.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
90
Code Parameter Name Description
bC-10
Running time of
latest fault
It displays the present running time when the latest fault occurs.
bC-11
Frequency of 2nd
fault
Same as bC-03~bC-10.
bC-12
Current of 2nd fault
bC-13
DC Bus voltage of
2nd fault
bC-14
Input terminal status
of 2nd fault
bC-15
Output terminal
status of 2nd fault
bC-16
Frequency inverter
status of 2nd fault
bC-17
Power-on time of
2nd fault
bC-18
Running time of 2nd
fault
bC-19
Frequency of 1st
fault
Same as bC-03~bC-10.
bC-20
Current of 1st fault
bC-21
DC Bus voltage of
1st fault
bC-22
Input terminal status
of 1st fault
bC-23
Output terminal
status of 1st fault
bC-24
Frequency inverter
status of 1st fault
bC-25
Power-on time of 1st
fault
bC-26
Running time of 1st
fault
5.14 Group C0: Process Control PID Function
PID control is a general process control method. By performing proportional, integral and differential
operations on the difference between the feedback signal and the target signal, it adjusts the output
frequency and constitutes a feedback system to stabilize the controlled counter around the target value.
It is applied to process control such as flow control, pressure control and temperature control. The
following figure shows the principle block diagram of PID control.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
91
Diagram 6-25 Principle block diagram of PID control.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-00
PID setting source
0: C0-01
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-function
0
C0-01
PID digital setting
0.0%~100.0% 50.0%
C0-00 is used to select the channel of target process PID setting. The PID setting is a relative value and
ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%. The PID feedback is also a relative value. The purpose of PID control is to
make the PID setting and PID feedback equal.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-02
PID setting change
time
0.00s~650.00s 0.00s
The PID setting change time indicates the time required for PID setting changing from 0.0% to 100.0%.
The PID setting changes linearly according to the change time, reducing the impact caused by sudden
setting change on the system.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-03
PID feedback
source
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (HDI)
4: AI1 – AI2
5: AI1 + AI2
6: MAX (|AI1|, |AI2|)
7: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: Communication setting
0
This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID. The PID feedback is a relative
value and ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%. Similarly, the feedback of PID is also a relative value. The function
of PID is to make the two values the equal.
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-04
PID action direction
0: Forward action
1: Reverse action
0
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
92
0: Forward action
When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting, the f requency inverter's output frequency rises. For
example, the winding tension control requires forward PID action.
1: Reverse action
When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting, the frequ ency inverter's output frequency reduces.
For example, the unwinding tension control requires reverse PID action.
Note this function is influenced b y the DI function 24 "Reverse PID action direction".
Code P arameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-05
PID setting
feedback range
0~65535 1000
This parameter is a non-dimensional unit. It is used for PID setting display (U0-15) and PID feedback
display (U0-16).
Relative value 100% of PID setting feedback corresponds to the value of C0-05. If C0-05 is set to 2000 and
PID setting is 100.0%, the PID setting display (U0-15) is 2000.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-06
Proportional gain
KP1
0.00~10.0 20.0
C0-07
Integral time TI1
0.01s~10.00s 2.00s
C0-08
Differential time TD1
0.000s~10.000s 0.000s
C0-06 (Proportional gain Kp1)
It decides the regulating intensi ty of the PID regulator. The higher the Kp1 is, the larger the regu lating
intensity is. The value 10.00 indicates when the d eviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100.0%,
the adjustment amplitude of the PID regulator on the output frequency reference is the maximum frequency.
C0-0 7 (Integral time Ti1)
It decides the integral regulating intensity. The shorter the integral time is, the larger the regulating intensity
is. When the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100.0%, the integral regulator performs
continuous adjustment for the time. Then the adjustment amplitude rea ches the maximum frequency.
C0-08 (Differential time Td1)
It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator on the deviation change. The longe r the differential
time is, the larger the regulating intensity is. Differential time is the time within w hich the feedback value
change reaches 100.0%, and then the adjustm ent amplitude reaches the maximum frequency.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-09
Proportional gain
KP2
0.00~10.00 20.0
C0-10
Integral time TI2
0.01s~10.00s 2.00s
C0-11
Differential time TD2
0.00s~10.00s 0.000s
C0-12
PID parameter
switchover condition
0: No switchover
1: Switchover via DI
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
0
C0-13
PID parameter
switchover deviation
1
0.0% ~ C0-14 20.0%
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
93
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-14
PID parameter
switchover deviation
2
C0-13 ~ 100.0% 80.0%
In some applications, PID parameters switchover is required when one group of PID parameters cannot
satisfy the requirement of the whole running process.
These parameters are used for switchover between two groups of PID parameters. Regulator parameters
C0-09 ~ C0-11 are set in the same way as C0-06 ~ C0-08.
The switchover can be implemented either via a DI terminal or automatically implemented based on the
deviation.
If you select switchover via a DI terminal, the DI must be set with function 43 "PID parameter switchover".
If the DI is OFF, group 1 (C0-06 ~ C0-08) is selected. If the DI is ON, group 2 (C0-09 to C0-11) is
selected.
If you select automatic switchover, when the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and
PID setting is smaller than the value of C0-13, group 1 is selected. When the absolute value of the deviation
between PID feedback and PID setting is higher than the value of C0-14, group 2 is selected. When the
deviation is between C0-13 and C0-14, the PID parameters are the linear interpolated value of the two
groups of parameter values.
Diagram 5-26 PID parameters sw itchover
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-15
PID integral property
Unit's digit: Integral separated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: Whether to stop integral operation when the
output reaches the limit.
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
00
Inte gral separation
If integral separation is set to valid, and the DI is defined as function 22 "PID integral p ause". In this case,
only proportional and differential operatio ns take effect.
If integral separation is set to inva lid, no matter whether the DI set with function 22 "PID integral paus e" is
ON or not, integral separation remains invalid.
Sto p integral
After the output has reached to m aximum or minimum limit in PID operation, we can se lect to stop the
integral operation or not. If we select to stop, it may help to reduce the PID overshoot.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
94
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-16
PID initial value
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C0-17
PID initial value
holding time
0.00s~650.00s 0.00s
When the frequency inverter starts up, the PID output initial value (C0-16) , and sustain the holding time
(C0-17), the PID start close-loop calculation .
Diagram 5-27 PID initial value function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-18
Frequency upper limit
of PID reverse
rotation
0.00 ~ maximum frequency 2.00 Hz
In some situations, only when the PID output frequency is a negative value (frequency inverter reverse
rotation), PID setting and PID feedback can be equal. However, too high reverse rotation frequency is
prohibited in some applications, and C0-18 is used to determine the reverse rotation frequency upper limit.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-19
PID deviation limit
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
If the deviation between PID fe edback and PID setting is smaller than the value of C0-19, P ID control stops.
The small deviation between PID feedb ack and PID setting will make the output frequency stabilize, which
is effective for some closed-loo p control applications.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-20
PID differential limit
0.00%~100.00% 0.10%
It is used to set the PID differential ou tput range. In PID control, the differential operation may easily ca use
system oscillation. Thus, the PID differential regulation is restricted to a small range.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-21
Maximum positive
deviation between
two PID outputs
0.00%~100.00% 1.00%
C0-22
Maximum negative
deviation between
two PID outputs
0.00%~100.00% 1.00%
This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID outputs (2 ms per PID output) to suppress the
rapid change of PID output and stabilize the running of the frequency inverter.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
95
C0-21 and C0-22 respectively are corresponding to the maximum absolute value of the output deviation in
forward direction and in reverse direction.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-23
PID feedback filter
time
0.00s~60.00s 0.00s
C0-24
PID output filter time
0.00s~60.00s 0.00s
C0-23 is used to filter the PID feed back, helping to reduce interference on the feedback but slowing the
response of the process closed-loop system.
C0-24 is used to filter the PID ou tput frequency, helping to weaken sudden change of the freq uency inverter
output frequency but slowing the response of the process closed-loop system.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-25
Detection value of
PID feedback loss
0.0%: Not judging feedback loss 0.1%~100.0% 0.0%
C0-26
Detection time of PID
feedback loss
0.0s~20.0s 0.0s
These parameters are used to judge whether PID fe edback is lost.
If the PID feedback is smaller than the value of C0 -25 and the lasting time exceeds the value of C0-26, the
frequency inverter reports Err3 1 and acts according to the selected fault protection action.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-27
PID operation at stop
0: No PID operation at stop
1: PID operation at stop
0
It is used to select whether to continue PID operation in the state of stopping. Generally, to set the PID
operation stops when the frequency inverter stops.
5.15 Group C1:Multi-function
The Multi-function of EM11 has many functions. Besides multi-speed , it can be used as the setting source of
the V/F separated voltage source and setting so urce of process PID. In addition, the Multi-function is relative
value.
The simple PLC function is diff erent from the EM11 user programmable function. Simple PLC can only
complete simple combination of Multi-function.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C1-00
Multi-function 0
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-01
Multi-function 1
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-02
Multi-function 2
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-03
Multi-function 3
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-04
Multi-function 4
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-05
Multi-function 5
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-06
Multi-function 6
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-07
Multi-function 7
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-08
Multi-function 8
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-09
Multi-function 9
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
96
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C1-10
Multi-function 10
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-11
Multi-function 11
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-12
Multi-function 12
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-13
Multi-function 13
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-14
Multi-function 14
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C1-15
Multi-function 15
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function can be the setting source of frequency, V/F separa ted voltage and process PID. The
Multi-function is relative value and ranges from -100.0% to 100.0%.
As frequency source, it is a percentage rela tive to the maximum frequency. As V/F separated voltage source,
it is a percentage relative to the rated motor voltage. As process PID setting source, it does not requir e
conversion.
Multi-function can be switched over based on different sta tes of DI terminals. For details, see the
descriptions of group b3.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C1-16
Multi-function 0
source
0: Set by C1-00
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: PID
6: Set by preset frequency (b0-12), mod ified via
terminal UP/ DOWN
0
It determines the setting channel of multi-function 0. You can perform convenient switchover between the
setting channels. When multi-fu nction or simple PLC is used as frequency source, the switchover between
two frequency sources can be realized easily .
5.16 Group C2: Simple PLC
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C2-00
Simple PLC running
mode
0: Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one cycle
1: Keep final values after the frequency inverter runs
one cycle
2: Repeat after the frequency inverter ru ns one cycle
0
0: Stop after the frequency inverter runs on e cycle
The frequency inverter stops after ru nning one cycle, and will not start up until receiving another command.
1: Keep final values after the frequency inverter run s one cycle
The frequency inverter keeps the final running f requency and direction after running one cycle.
2: Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
The frequency inverter automatically starts another cycle after running one cycle, and will not stop until
receiving the stop command.
Simple PLC can be either the frequency source or V/F separated voltage source.
When simple PLC is used as the frequency source, whether parameter values of C1-00 ~ C1-15 are positive
or negative determines the frequency inverter running direction. If the parameter values are negative, it
indicates that the frequency inverter runs in reverse direction.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
97
Diagram 5-28 Simple PLC when used as frequency source
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C2-01
Simple PLC record
selection
Unit's digit: Record of power failure.
0: no record after power off
1: record after power off
Ten's digit: Record of stopping.
0: no record after stopping
1:record after stopping
00
PLC record of power failure indicates that the frequency inverter memorizes the PLC running stage and
running frequency before power failure, and frequency inverter will continue to run from the memorized
stage after it is powered on again. If the unit's digit is set to 0, the frequency inverter restarts the PLC
process after it is powered on again.
PLC record of stopping indicates that the frequency inverter records the PLC running stage and running
frequency of stop, and frequency inverter will continue to run from the recorded stage after power on again.
If the ten's digit is set to 0, the frequency inverter will restarts the PLC process after it power on again.
Code Pa rameter Name Setting Range Default
C2-02
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 0
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-03
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 0
0~3 0
C2-04
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 1
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-05
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 1
0~3 0
C2-06
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 2
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-07
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 2
0~3 0
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
98
Code Pa rameter Name Setting Range Default
C2-08
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 3
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-09
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 3
0~3 0
C2-10
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 4
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-11
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 4
0~3 0
C2-12
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 5
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-13
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 5
0~3 0
C2-14
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 6
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-15
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 6
0~3 0
C2-16
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 7
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-17
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 7
0~3 0
C2-18
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 8
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-19
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 8
0~3 0
C2-20
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 9
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-21
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 9
0~3 0
C2-22
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 10
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-23
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 10
0~3 0
C2-24
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 11
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-25
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 11
0~3 0
C2-26
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 12
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
99
Code Pa rameter Name Setting Range Default
C2-27
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 12
0~3 0
C2-28
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 13
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-29
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 13
0~3 0
C2-30
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 14
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-31
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 14
0~3 0
C2-32
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 15
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h)
C2-33
Acceleration/deceleration
time of simple PLC
Segment 15
0~3 0
C2-34
Time unit of simple PLC
running
0: s (second)
1: h (hour)
0
5.17 Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
The swing frequency function is applied to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the applications where
traversing and winding functions are required.
The swing frequency function indicates that the output frequency of the frequency inverter swings up and
down with the setting frequency as the center. The trace of running frequency at the time axis is shown in
the following figure.
The swing amplitude is set in C3-00 and C3-01. When C3-01 is set to 0, the swing amplitude is 0 and the
swing frequency does not take effect.
Diagram 5-29 Swing frequency control
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C3-00
Swing frequency
setting mode
0: Relative to the central frequency
1: Relative to the maximum frequency
0
This parameter is used to select the basic value of the swing amplitude.
0: Relative to the central frequency (b0-07 frequency source selection)
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
100
It is variable swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude varies with the central frequency (setting
frequency).
1: Relative to the maximum frequency (b0-13 maximum output frequency)
It is fixed swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude is fixed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C3-01
Swing frequency
amplitude
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
C3-02
Textile jump
frequency amplitude
of Swing running
0.0%~50.0% 0.0%
This parameter is used to set the jump frequency amplitude of swing running. The swing frequency is
limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.
If swin g frequency is relative to the central frequency (C3-00 = 0), the actual swing amplitude AW=
b0-07 (Frequency source) ×C3-01(Swing frequency amplitude).
If swing frequency is relative to the maximum frequency (C3-00 = 1), the actual swing amplitude AW =
b0-13 (Maximum frequency) ×C3-01(Swing frequency amplitude).
The jump frequency is relative to the percentage of swing frequency amplitude. That is to say, jump
frequency = Swing frequency running amplitude AW×C3-02 (Jump frequency amplitude).
If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the central frequency (C3-00 = 0), the jump frequency is a
variable value.
If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the maximum frequency (C3-00 = 1), the jump frequency is
a fixed value.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C3-03
Swing frequency
cycle
0.1s~3000.0s 10.0s
C3-04
Triangular wave
rising time coefficient
0.1%~100.0% 50.0%
C3-03 specifies the time of a complete swing frequency cycle.
C3-04 specifies the time percentage of triangular wave rising time to C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle).
Triangular wave rising time = C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle) × C3-04 (Triangular wave rising time
coefficient, unit: s)
Triangular wave falling time = C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle) × (1 – C3-04 Triangular wave rising time
coefficient ,unit: s)
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C3-05
Set length 0m~65535 m 10 00 m
C3-06
Actual length 0m~65535 m 0 m
C3-07
Number of pulses per
meter
0.1~6553.5 100.0
The above parameters are used for fixed length control.
The length information is collected by DI terminals. C3-06 (Actual length) is calculated by dividing the
number of pulses collected by the DI terminal by C3-07 (Number of pulses each meter).
When the actual length C3-06 exceeds the set length in C3-05, the DO terminal set with function “Length
reached” becomes ON.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
101
During the fixed length control, the length reset operation can be performed via the DI terminal. For details,
see the descriptions of b3-00 to b3-11.
Please set corresponding DI terminal with function 30 (Length count input) in applications. If the pulse
frequency is high, DI6 terminal must be used.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C3-08
Set count value 1~65535 1000
C3-09
Designated count
value
1~65535 1000
The count value needs to be collected by DI terminal. Set the corresponding DI terminal with function
28(Counter input) in applications. If the pulse frequency is high, DI6 terminal must be used.
When the counting value reaches the set count value (C3-08), the DO terminal set with function (Set count
value reached) becomes ON. Then the counter stops counting.
When the counting value reaches the designated counting value (C3-09), the DO terminal set with function
(Designated count value reached) becomes ON. Then the counter continues to count until the set count
value is reached.
5.18 Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-00
Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Model
dependent
d0-01
Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Model
dependent
d0-02
Rated motor current
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power ≤55 kW)
0.1A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
d0-03
Rated motor
frequency
0.01 Hz~ maximum frequency 50.00Hz
d0-04
Rated motor
rotational speed
1rpm~65535rpm
Model
dependent
Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V/F control or vector control is
adopted.
To achieve better V/F or vector control performance, motor auto-tuning is required. The motor auto-tuning
accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor nameplate parameters.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-05
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
d0-06
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
d0-07
Leakage inductive
reactance
(asynchronous motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (frequency inverter power ≥75
kW)
Model
dependent
d0-08
Mutual inductive
reactance
(asynchronous motor)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75
kW)
Model
dependent
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
102
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-09
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
0.01A ~ d0-02 (Frequency inverter power ≤55 kW)
0.1A to d0-02 (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
The parameters in d0-05 ~ d0-09 are asynchronous motor parameters. These parameters are unavailable on
the motor nameplate and are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. Only d0-05 ~ d0-07 can be obtained
through static motor auto-tuning. Through complete motor auto-tuning, encoder phase sequence and
current loop PI can be obtained besides the parameters in d0-05 ~ d0-09.
When the "Rated motor power" (d0-00) or "Rated motor voltage" (d0-01) is changed; the frequency
inverter automatically restores values of d0-05 ~ d0-09, to restore setting of these 5 parameters according to
common standard Y series asynchronous motor.
If it is impossible to perform motor auto-tuning onsite, manually set the values of these parameters
according to data provided by the motor manufacturer.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-15
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~ 6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75
kW)
Model
dependent
d0-16
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (frequency inverter powe r≤ 55
kW)
0.001~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
d0-17
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (frequency inverter powe r≤ 55
kW)
0.001 mH~65.535 mH (frequency inverter power ≥75
kW)
Model
dependent
d0-18
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
0.1V~6553.5 V
Model
dependent
The d0-15~d0-18 are synchronous motor parameters. These parameters are unavailable on the nameplate of
most synchronous motors and can be obtained by means of "Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning".
Through "Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning", only the encoder phase sequence and installation
angle can be obtained.
Each time "Rated motor power" (d0-00) or "Rated motor voltage" (d0-01) is changed; the frequency
inverter will automatically modify the values of d0-15~ d0-18.
You can also directly set the parameters based on the data provided by the synchronous motor
manufacturer.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-19
Encoder pulses per
revolution
1~32767 1024
This parameter is used to set the pulses per revolution (PPR) of ABZ or UVW incremental encoder. In VC
mode, the motor cannot run properly if this parameter is set incorrectly.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
103
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-20
Encoder type
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver
2: UVW incremental encoder
3: Reserved
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
0
The EM11 supports multiple types of encoder. Different PG cards are required for different types of
encoder. Select the appropriate PG card for the encoder used. Any of the five encoder types is applicable to
synchronous motor. Only ABZ incremental encoder and resolver are applicable to asynchronous motor.
After installation of the PG card is complete, set this parameter properly based on the actual condition.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter cannot run properly.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-21
A/B phase sequence
of ABZ incremental
encoder
0: Forward
1: Reserve
0
This parameter is valid only for ABZ incremental encoder (d0-20 = 0) and is used to set the A/B phase
sequence of the ABZ incremental encoder.
It is valid for both asynchronous motor and synchronous motor. The A/B phase sequence can be obtained
through "Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning" or "Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning".
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-22
Encoder installation
angle
0.0°~359.9° 0.0°
This parameter is applicable only to synchronous motor. It is valid for ABZ incremental encoder, UVW
incremental encoder, resolver and wire-saving UVW encoder, but invalid for SIN/COS encoder.
It can be obtained through synchronous motor no-load auto-turning or with-load auto-tuning. After
installation of the synchronous motor is complete, the value of this parameter must be obtained by motor
auto-tuning. Otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-23
U, V, W phase
sequence of UVW
encoder
0: Forward
1: Reverse
0
d0-24
UVW encoder angle
offset
0.0°~359.9° 0.0°
These two parameters are valid only when the UVW encoder is applied to a synchronous motor. They can
be obtained by synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning or with-load auto-tuning. After installation of the
synchronous motor is complete, the values of these two parameters must be obtained by motor auto-tuning.
Otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-28
Number of pole pairs
of resolver
1~99 1
If a resolver is applied, set the number of pole pairs p roperly.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
104
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-29
Encoder wire-break
fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s
0.0s
This parameter is used to set the detecting time that a wire-break faults. If it is set to 0.0s, the frequency
inverter does not detect the encoder wire-break fault. If the duration time of the encoder wire-break fault
detected by the frequency inverter exceeds the time set in this parameter, the frequency inverter reports
Err20.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-30
Motor 1 auto-tuning
selection
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
0
0: No auto-tuning
Auto-tuning is prohibited.
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
It is applicable to scenarios where complete auto-tuning cannot be performed because the asynchronous
motor cannot be disconnected from the load.
Before performing static auto-tuning, properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of d0-00
~ d0-04 firstly. The frequency inverter will obtain parameters of d0-05 ~ d0-07 by static auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 1, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts static
auto-tuning.
2: Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning
To perform this type of auto-tuning, ensure that the motor is disconnected from the load. During the process
of complete auto-tuning, the frequency inverter performs static auto-tuning first and then accelerates to 80%
of the rated motor frequency within the acceleration time set in b0-21. The frequency inverter keeps
running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with deceleration time set in b0-22.
Before performing complete auto-tuning, properly set the motor type, motor nameplate parameters of b0-00
and d0-00~ d0-04, "Encoder type" (d0-20) and "Encoder pulses per revolution" (d0-19) first.
The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0-05 ~ d0-09, "A/B phase sequence of ABZ
incremental encoder" (d0-21) and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1-10 ~ d1-13 by complete
auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 2, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts complete
auto- tuning.
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
It is applicable to site where the synchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load. During
with-load auto-tuning, the motor rotates at the speed of 10 RPM.
Before performing with-load auto-tuning, properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of
b0-00 and d0-00 ~ d0-04 first.
By with-load auto-tuning, the frequency inverter obtains the initial position angle of the synchronous motor,
which is a necessary prerequisite of the motor's normal running. Before the first use of the synchronous
motor after installation, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 11, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts with-load
auto-tuning.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
105
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
If the synchronous motor can be disconnected from the load, no-load auto-tuning is recommended, which
will achieve better running performance compared with with-load auto-tuning.
During the process of no-load auto-tuning, the frequency inverter performs with-load auto-tuning firstly
and then accelerates to 80% of the rated motor frequency with the acceleration time set in b0-21. The
frequency inverter keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with the deceleration time
set in b0-22.
Before performing no-load auto-tuning, properly set the motor type, motor nameplate parameters of b0-00
and d0-00 ~ d0-04, "Encoder type" (d0-20) and "Encoder pulses per revolution" (d0-19) and "Number of
pole pairs of resolver" (d0-28) first.
The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0-15 ~ d0 -18, encoder related parameters of d0-21
~ d0-24 and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1-10 ~ d1-13 by no-load auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 12, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts no-load
auto-tuning.
Note: Motor auto-tuning can be performed only in operation panel mode.
5.19 Group d1: Motor 1 vector control parameters
The Group d1 function codes are only valid for motor 1 vector control. It is invalid for motor 2 parameters
or motor 1 V/F control.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-00
Speed/Torque control
selection
0: Speed control
1: Torque control
0
It is used to select the frequency inverter's control mode: speed control or torque control.
The EM11 provides DI terminals with two torque related functions, function 21 (Torque control prohibited)
and function 20 (Speed control/Torque control switchover). The two DI terminals need to be used together
with d1-00 to implement speed control/torque control switchover.
If the DI terminal set with function 20 (Speed control/Torque control switchover) is OFF, the control mode
is determined by d1-00. If the DI terminal set with function 20 is ON, the control mode is reverse to the
value of d1-00.
However, if the DI terminal with function 21 (Torque control prohibited) is ON, the frequency inverter is
fixed to run in the speed control mode.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-01
Speed loop
proportional gain
1(Kp1)
0.01~10.00 0.30
d1-02
Speed loop integral
time 1(Ti1)
0.01s~10.00s 0.50s
d1-03
Switchover frequency
1
0.00 ~ d1-06 5.00 Hz
d1-04
Speed loop
proportional gain
2(KP2)
0.01~10.00 0.20
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
106
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-05
Speed loop integral
time 2(Ti2)
0.01s~10.00s 1.00s
d1-06
Switchover frequency
2
d1-03~ maximum output frequency 10.00 Hz
Speed loop PI parameters vary with running frequencies of the frequency inverter.
If the running frequency is less than or equal to "Switchover frequency 1" (d1-03), the speed loop PI
parameters are d1-01 and d1-02.
If the running frequency is equal to or greater than "Switchover frequency 2" (d1-06), the speed loop PI
parameters are d1-04 and d1-05.
If the run ning frequency is between d1-03 and d1-06, the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from
the linear switchover between the two groups of PI parameters, as shown in Diagram 6-30.
•
Diagram 5-30 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters
The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional
gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. Be aware
that this may lead to system oscillation. The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the factory setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the proportional gain
first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system
has quick response and small overshoot.
Note: Improper PI parameter setting may cause too large speed overshoot, and overvoltage fault may even
occur when the overshoot drops.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-07
Speed loop integral
property
0: Integral separation disabled
1: Integral separation enabled
0
d1-10
Excitation current
loop proportional gain
0~30000 2000
d1-11
Excitation current
loop integral gain
0~30000 1300
d1-12
Torque current loop
proportional gain
0~30000 2000
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
107
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-13
Torque current loop
integral gain
0~30000 1300
These are current loop PI parameters for vector control. These parameters are automatically obtained
through "Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning" or "Synchronous motor no- load auto-tuning", and
need not be modified.
The dimension of the current loop integral regulator is integral gain rather than integral time. Note that too
large current loop PI gain may lead to oscillation of the entire control loop.
Therefore, when current oscillation or torque fluctuation is great, manually decrease the proportional gain
or integral gain here.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-14
Motor running torque
upper limit source in
speed control mode
0: d1-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0
d1-15
Braking torque upper
limit source in speed
control mode
0: d1-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0
d1-16
Digital setting of
motor running torque
limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0%
d1-17
Digital setting of
braking torque limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0%
In the speed control mode, the maximum output torque of the frequency inverter is restricted by d1-14. If
the torque upper limit is analog, pulse or communication setting, 100% of the setting corresponds to the
value of d1-16, and 100% of the value of d1-16 corresponds to the frequency inverter rated torque.
For details on the AI1, AI2 and AI3 setting, see the description of the AI curves. For details on the pulse
setting, see the description of b5-00 ~ b5-04.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-18
Motor running slip
gain
50%~200% 100%
For SVC, it is used to adjust speed stability accuracy of the motor. When the motor with load runs at a very
low speed, increase the value of this parameter; when the motor with load runs at a very fast speed,
decrease the value of this parameter.
For VC, it is used to adjust the output current of the frequency inverter with same load.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
108
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-21
PM field weakening
mode of synchronous
motor
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Automatic adjustment
1
d1-22
PM field weakening
depth of synchronous
motor
50%~500% 100%
d1-23
Maximum current of
PM field weakening
1%~300% 50%
d1-24
PM Field weakening
automatic adjustment
gain
0.10~5.00 1.00
d1-25
PM Field weakening
integral multiple
2~10 2
These parameters are used to set field weakening control for the synchronous motor.
If d1-21 is set to 0, field weakening control on the synchronous motor is disabled. In this case, the
maximum rotational speed is related to the frequency inverter DC bus voltage. If the motor's maximum
rotational speed cannot meet the requirements, enable the field weakening function to increase the speed.
The EM11 provides two field weakening modes: direct calculation and automatic adjustment.
In direct calculation mode, directly calculate the demagnetized current and manually adjust the
demagnetized current by parameter d1-22. The smaller the demagnetized current is, the smaller the total
output current is. However, the desired field weakening effect may not be achieved.
In automatic adj ustment mode, the best demagnetized current is selected automatically.
This may influence the system dynamic performance or cause instability.
The adjustment speed of the field weakening current can be changed by modifying the values of d1-24 and
d1-25. A very quick adjustment may cause instability. Therefore, generally do not modify them manually.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-26
Torque setting source
in torque control
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the digital
setting of d1-27.
0
d1-27
Torque digital setting
in torque control
-200.0%~200.0% 100.0%
The d1-26 is used to set the torque setting source. There are a total of eight torque setting sources.
The torque setting is a relative value. 100.0% corresponds to the frequency inverter's rated torque. The
setting range is -200.0% ~ 200.0%, indicating the frequency inverter's maximum torque is twice of the
frequency inverter's rated torque.
If the torque setting is positive, the frequency inverter rotates in forward direction. If the torque setting is
negative, the frequency inverter rotates in reverse direction.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
109
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
The target torque directly uses the value set in d1-27.
1:AI1
2:AI2
3:AI3
The target torque is decided by analog input. The EM11 control board provides two AI terminals (AI1, AI2).
Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card. AI1 is 0V~10 V voltage input, AI2 is
0V~10 V voltage input or 4mA~20mA current input decided by jumper on the control board, and AI3 is -10
V ~ +10 V voltage input.
For the details of AI Curve setting, please refer to the description of analog input parameters.
When AI is used as frequency setting source, the corresponding value 100% of voltage/ current input
corresponds to the value of d1-27.
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
The target torque is set by DI6 (high-speed pulse). The pulse setting signal specification is 9V~30 V
(voltage range) and 0 kHz~100 kHz (frequency range). The pulse can only be input via DI6. The
relationship (which is a two-point line) between DI6 input pulse frequency and the corresponding value is
set in b5-00 ~ b5-03. The corresponding value 100.0% of pulse input corresponds to the percentage of
d1-27.
5: Communication setting
The target torque is set by means of communication.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-30
Forward maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz
d1-31
Reverse maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz
The two parameters are used to set the maximum frequency in forward or reverse rotation in torque control
mode.
In torque control, if the load torque is smaller than the motor output torque, the motor's rotational speed
will rise continuously. To avoid runaway of the mechanical system, the motor maximum rotating speed
must be limited in torque control.
You can implement continuous change of the maximum frequency in torque control dynamically by
controlling the frequency upper limit.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-32
Acceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s
d1-33
Deceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s
In torque control, the difference between the motor output torque and the load torque determines the speed
change rate of the motor and load. The motor rotational speed may change quickly and this will result in
noise or too large mechanical stress. The setting of acceleration/deceleration time in torque control makes
the motor rotational speed change softly.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
110
However, in applications requiring rapid torque response, set the acceleration/deceleration time in torque
control to 0.00s. For example, two frequency inverters are connected to drive the same load. To balance the
load allocation, set one frequency inverter as master in speed control and the other as slave in torque
control. The slave receives the master's output torque as the torque command and must follow the master
rapidly. In this case, the acceleration/deceleration time of the slave in torque control is set to 0.0s.
5.20 Group d2: Motor 1 V/F Control Parameters
Group d2 is valid only for V/F control.
The V/F control mode is applicable to low requirement load applications (fan or pump) or applications
where one frequency inverter operates multiple motors or there is a large difference between the frequency
inverter power and the motor power.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-00
V/F curve setting
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2-power V/F
4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation
0
0: Linear V/F
It is applicable to common constant torque load.
1: Multi-point V/F
It is applicable to special load such as dehydrator and centrifuge. Any relationship V/F curve can be
obtained by setting parameters of d2-03 ~ d2-08.
2: Square V/F
It is applicable to centrifugal loads such as fan and pump.
3 ~ 8: V/F curve between linear V/F and square V/F
10: V/F complete separation
In this mode, the output frequency and output voltage of the frequency inverter are independent. The output
frequency is determined by the frequency source, and the output voltage is determined by "Voltage source
for V/F separation" (d2-12).
It is applicable to induction heating, inverse power supply and torque motor control.
11: V/F half separation
In this mode, V and F are proportional and the proportional relationship can be set in d2-12. The
relationship between V and F are also related to the “rated motor voltage” and “rated motor frequency”.
Assume that the voltage source input is X (0% ~100%), the relationship between V and F is:
V/F = 2 × X × (Rated motor voltage)/ (Rated motor frequency)
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-01
Torque boost
0.0% ( torque auto-boost)
0.1%~30.0%
0
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
111
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-02
Cut-off frequency of
torque boost
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated frequency*d2-02
50.0%
To compensate the low frequency torque characteristics of V/F control, you can boost the output voltage of
the frequency inverter at low frequency by modifying d2-01.
If the torque boost is set to too large, the motor is easily overheated, and the frequency inverter easily
suffers over current.
If the load is large and the motor startup torque is insufficient, increase the value of d2-01. If the load is
small, decrease the value of d2-01. If it is set to 0.0, the frequency inverter performs automatic torque boost.
In this case, the frequency inverter automatically calculates the torque boost value based on motor
parameters including the stator resistance.
d2-02 specifies the frequency under which torque boost is valid. Torque boost becomes invalid when this
frequency is exceeded, as shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-31 Manual torque boost
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-03
Multi-point V/F
frequency 1 (F1)
0.00 Hz ~ d2-05 0.00 Hz
d2-04
Multi-point V/F
voltage 1 (V1)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
d2-05
Multi-point V/F
frequency 2 (F2)
d2-03 to d2-07 0.00 Hz
d2-06
Multi-point V/F
voltage 2 (V2)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
d2-07
Multi-point V/F
frequency 3 (F3)
d2-05 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz
d2-08
Multi-point V/F
voltage 3 (V3)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
112
When d2-00 set to 1, these six parameters are used to define the multi-point V/F curve.
The multi-point V/F curve is set based on the motor's load characteristic. The relationship between voltages
and frequencies is: V1 < V2 < V3, F1 < F2 < F3. Diagram 6-32 shows the setting of multi-point V/F curve.
At low frequency, higher voltage may cause motor overheat or even burnt and cause frequency inverter
over current stall or over current protection.
Diagram 5-32 Setting of multi-point V/F curve
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-09
V/F slip compensation
coefficient
0.0%~200.0% 0.0%
This parameter is valid only for the asynchronous motor.
It can compensate the rotational speed slip of the asynchronous motor when the load of the motor increases,
stabilizing the motor speed in case of load change.
If this parameter is set to 100%, it indicates that the compensation when the motor bears rated load is the
rated motor slip. The rated motor slip is automatically obtained by the frequency inverter through
calculation based on the rated motor frequency and rated motor rotational speed in group d0.
Generally, if the motor rotational speed is different from the target speed, slightly adjust this parameter.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-10
V/F oscillation
suppression gain
0~100 0
The setting method for this parameter is to set as small as possible on the premise of effective oscillation
suppression, to avoid the badly effect for V/F running. When there is no oscillation of the motor, please set
the gain to 0. Only when there is obvious oscillation of the motor, you can increase the gain properly. The
larger the gain is, more obviously the effect of oscillation suppression is.
When the oscillation suppression function is used, the parameters of motor rated current and no-load
current must be set correctly, or the effect of oscillation suppression is poor.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
113
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-12
Voltage source for
V/F separation
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication setting
(Note: 100.0% corresponds to the rated motor volt age)
0
d2-13
Voltage digital setting
for V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage 0 V
V/F separation is generally applicable to these sites, such as induction heating, inverse power supply and
motor torque control.
If V/F separated control is enabled, the output voltage can be set in d2-13 or by analog, Multi-function,
simple PLC, PID or communication. If you set the output voltage by means of non-digital settin g, 100% of
the setting corresponds to the rated motor voltage. If a negative percentage is set, its absolute value is used
as the effective value.
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
The output voltage is set directly in d2-13.
1: AI1;
2: AI2;
3: AI3
The output voltage is set by analog input terminals.
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
The output voltage is set by pulses of the terminal DI6.
Pulse setting specification: voltage range 9V~30 V, frequency range 0kHz~100 kHz
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
If the voltage source is simple PLC mode, parameters in group FC must be set to determine the setting
output voltage.
7: PID
The output voltage is generated based on PID closed loop. For details, see the description of PID in group
C0.
8: Communication setting
The output voltage is set by the host computer by means of communication.
The voltage source for V/F separation is selected in the similar way to the frequency source selection. For
details, see b0-03 (main frequency source X specification). 100.0% of the setting in each mode corresponds
to the rated motor voltage. If the corresponding value is negative, its absolute value is used.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-14
Voltage rise time of
V/F separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the v oltage rising from 0 V
~ rated motor voltage.
0.0s
d2-14 indicates the time required for the output voltage to rise from 0 V to the rated motor voltage shown
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
114
as t1 in the following figure.
Diagram 5-33 Voltage of V/F separation
5.21 Group d3 to d5: Relevant parameters of motor 2
EM11 series support the switchover of two groups of motor parameters, and the two motors can separately
set the motor nameplate parameters, motor auto-tuning parameters, V/F control or vector control mode, the
related parameters of encoder and the related performance parameters of V/F control or vector control
mode.
For the setting of motor 2, please refer to the relevant description of motor1 parameters.
5.22 Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-00
Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~15.0 kHz
Model
dependent
It is used to adjust the carrier frequency of the frequency inverter, helping to reduce the motor noise,
avoiding the resonance of the mechanical system, and reducing the leakage current to earth and interference
generated by the frequency inverter.
If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonic wave, and then the motor will increase
power loss and temperature rising.
If the carrier frequency is higher, the power loss and temperature rising of the motor will decline. However,
the frequency inverter will have an increasing in power loss, temperature rising and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following table.
Table 6-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency Low → High
Motor noise Large → Small
Output current
Bad → Good
Motor temperature
High → Low
Frequency inverter
Low → High
Leakage current Small → Large
External radiation
interference
Small → Large
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
115
The factory setting of carrier frequency varies with the frequency inverter power. If you need to modify the
carrier frequency, note that if the set carrier frequency is higher than factory setting, it will lead to an
increase in temperature rise of the frequency inverter's heatsink. In this case, you need to de-rate the
frequency inverter. Otherwise, the frequency inverter may overheat and alarm.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-01
DPWM switchover
frequency upper limit
0.00Hz~15.00 Hz 12.00 Hz
This parameter is valid only for V/F control.
It is used to determine the wave modulation mode in V/F control of asynchronous motor. If the frequency is
lower than the value of this parameter, the waveform is 7-segment continuous modulation. If the frequency
is higher than the value of this parameter, the waveform is 5-segment intermittent modulation.
The 7-segment continuous modulation causes more wastage of IGBT switches of the frequency inverter but
smaller current ripple. The 5-segment intermittent modulation causes less wastage of IGBT switches of the
frequency inverter but larger current ripple. This parameter may lead to motor running instability at high
frequency. Do not modify this parameter generally.
For instability of V/F control, refer to parameter d2-10. For wastage of frequency inverter and temperature
rising, please refer to parameter d6-00.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-02
PWM modulation
mode
0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
0
This parameter is valid only for V/F control.
Synchronous modulation indicates that the carrier frequency varies linearly with the change of the output
frequency, ensuring that the ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency remains unchanged. Synchronous
modulation is generally used at high output frequency, which helps improve the output voltage quality.
At low output frequency (100 Hz or lower), synchronous modulation is not required. This is because ratio
of carrier frequency to output frequency is still high, and asynchronous modulation is more superior at such
low running frequency.
Synchronous modulation takes effect only when the running frequency is higher than 85 Hz. If the
frequency is lower than 85 Hz, asynchronous modulation is always valid.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-03
Carrier frequency
adjustment with
temperature
0: No
1: Yes
1
It is used to set whether the carrier frequency is adjusted based on the temperature. The frequency inverter
automatically reduces the carrier frequency when detecting that the heatsink temperature is high. The
frequency inverter restores the carrier frequency to the set value when the heatsink temperature becomes
normal. This function is used to reduces the overheat alarms.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-04 Random PWM depth
0: Random PWM invalid
1~10: Random PWM carrier frequency depth
0
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
116
The setting of random PWM depth can make the motor shrill noise to soft and reduce the electromagnetic
interference to other equipments. If this parameter is set to 0, random PWM is invalid.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-05
Dead zone
compensation mode
selection
0: No compensation
1: Compensation mode 1
2: Compensation mode 2
1
Generally, you need not modify this parameter. Try to use a different compensation mode only when there
is special requirement on the output voltage waveform quality or oscillation occurs on the motor.
For high power frequency inverter, compensation mode 2 is recommended.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-06
SVC mode selection
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
1
SVC mode 0: Used in the application that high speed stability required.
SVC mode 1: Used in the application that high torque control linearity required.
5.23 Group U0: Monitoring Parameters
Group U0 is used to monitor the frequency inverter's running state. You can view the parameter values by
using operation panel, convenient for on-site commissioning, or from the host computer by means of
communication (address: 0x7000 ~ 0x7044).
U0-00 ~ U0-31 are the monitoring parameters in the running and stop state defined by b9-02 and b9-03.
For more details, see Table 6-1.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-00
Running frequency 0.00~300.00 Hz (b0-11 = 2)
0.00~3000.0 Hz (b0-11 = 1)
U0-01
Setting frequency
These two parameters display the absolute value of theoretical running frequency and set frequency. For the
actual output frequency of the frequency inverter, see U0-19.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-02
DC Bus voltage 0.0~3000.0 V
It displays the frequency inverter's DC bus voltage.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-03
Output voltage 0V~1140 V
It displays the frequency inverter's output voltage in the running state.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-04
Output current
0.00A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power ≤ 55 kW)
0.0A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power > 55 kW)
It displays the frequency inverter's output current in the running state.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-05
Output power 0~32767
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
117
It displays the frequency inverter's output power in the running state.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-06
Output torque -200.0%~200.0%
It displays the frequency inverter's output torque in the running state.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-07
DI state -0~32767
It displays the present state of DI terminals. After the value is converted into a binary number, each bit
corresponds to a DI. "1" indicates high level signal, and "0" indicates low level signal. The corresponding
relationship between bits and DIx is described in the following table.
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-08
DO state 0~1023
It indicates the present state of DO terminals. After the value is converted into a binary number, each bit
corresponds to a DO terminal. "1" indicates high level signal, and "0" indicates low level signal. The
corresponding relationship between bits and DOx is described in the following table.
Table 6-15 Corresponding relationship between bits and DOs
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5
DO3 Relay 1 Relay 2 DO1 DO2 VDO1
Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11
VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-14
Load speed display 0~65535
For more details, see the description of b9-06.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-15
PID setting 0~65535
U0-16
PID feedback 0~65535
They display the PID setting value and PID feedback value.
PID setting = PID setting (perce ntage) ×C0-05
PID feedback = PID feedback (percentage) × C0-05
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-18
Input pulse frequency 0.00kHz ~100.00 kHz
It displays the high-speed pulse sampled frequency of DI6, in minimum unit of 0.01 kHz.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-19
Feedback speed,
unit:0.01Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
It displays the actual output frequency of the frequency inverter.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
118
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is set to 1, the display range is -3000.00~3000.00 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is set to 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-20
Remaining running
time
0.0min~6500.0 min
It displays the remaining running time when the timing operation is enabled. For details on timing
operation, refer to b2-28 ~ b2-30.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-21
AI1 voltage before
correction
0.00V~10.57 V
U0-22
AI2 voltage before
correction
0.00V~10.57 V
U0-23
AI3 voltage before
correction
-10.57V~10.57 V
They display the AI sampling voltage actual value. The actually used voltage is obtained after linear
correction, which will reduce the deviation between the sampled voltage and the actual input voltage.
For actual corrected voltage, see U0-09, U0-10 and U0-11. Refer to group b8 for the correction mode.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-24
Linear speed 0.0min~65535m/min
It displays the linear speed of the DI6 high-speed pulse sampling. The unit is meter per minute (meter/min).
The linear speed is calculated according to the actual number of pulses sampled per minute and C3-07
(Number of pulses per meter).
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-27
Communication
setting value
-100.00%~100.00%
It displays the data written in by means of the communication address 0x1000.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-28
Encoder feedback
speed
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
It displays the motor running frequency measured by the encoder.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-29
Main frequency X
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
It displays the setting of main frequency X.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
119
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-30
Auxiliary frequency Y
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
It displays the setting of auxiliary frequency Y.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-32
Synchronous motor
rotor position
0.0°~ 359.9°
It displays the rotor position of the synchronous motor.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-33
Motor temperature 0°C~200°C
It displays the motor temperature obtained by means of AI3 sampling. For the motor temperature detection
details, see bb-25.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-34
Target torque -200 .0%~200.0%
It displays the present torque upper limit value.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-35
Resolver position 0~4095
It displays the current resolver position.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-36
Power factor angle -
It displays the present power factor angle.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-37
ABZ position 0~65535
It displays the phase A and B pulse counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder. This value is four times
the number of pulses that the encoder runs. For example, if the display is 4000, the actual number of pulses
that the encoder runs is 4000/4 = 1000.
The value increase when the encoder rotates in forward direction and decreases when the encoder rotates in
reverse direction. After increasing to 65535, the value starts to increase from 0 again. After decreasing to 0,
the value starts to decrease from 65535 again.
You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing U0-37.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-38
Target voltage of V/F
separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
U0-39
Output voltage of V/F
separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
They display the target output voltage and present actual output voltage in the V/F separation state. For V/F
separation more details, see the descriptions of group d2.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
120
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-40
DI input state visual
display
-
It displays the DI state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-34 Display format of the DI state
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-41
DO output state visual
display
-
It displays the DO state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-35 Display format of the DO state
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-42
DI function state
visual display
-
It displays whether the DI functions 1-40 are valid. The operation panel has five 7-segment LEDs and each
7-segment LED displays the selection of eight functions. The 7-segment LED is defined in the following
figure.
Diagram 5-36 Definition of 7-segment LED
The 7-segment LED display functions 1-8, 9-16, 17-24, 25-32 and 33-40 respectively from right to left.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-43
DO function state
visual display
-
It displays whether the DO functions 41~59 are valid. The display format is similar to U0-42.
The 7-segment LEDs display functions 41–48, 49–56 and 57–59, respectively from right to left.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-45
Phase Z signal
counting
-
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
121
It displays the phase Z counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder. The value increases or decreases by
1 every time the encoder rotates a round forwardly or reversely. You can check whether the installation of
the encoder is normal by viewing U0-45.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-46
Present setting
frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
U0-47
Present running
frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
It displays the present setting frequency and running frequency. 100.00% corresponds to the frequency
inverter's maximum frequency (b0-13).
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-48
Frequency inverter
running state
0~65535
It displays the running state of the frequency inverter. The data format is listed in the following table:
U0-48
Bit0
Bit1
0: stop
1: forwarder running
2: reverse running
Bit 2
Bit3
0: constant speed
1:acceleration
2:deceleration
Bit 4
0:Normal DC bus voltage
1:Low DC bus voltage
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-49
Sent value of
point-point
communication
-100.00%~100.00%
U0-50
Received value of
point-point
communication
-100.00%~100.00%
It displays the data at point-point communication. U0-49 is the data sent by the master, and U0-50 is the
data received by the slave.
5.24 Group A0: System parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A0-00
User password 0~65535 0
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a password has been
set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu. If the entered password
is incorrect you cannot view or modify parameters.
If A0-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password protection function
is disabled.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
122
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A0-01
Product number
Frequency inverter product number
Model
dependent
A0-02
Software version
Software version of control board
Model
dependent
A0-07
Parameter
modification property
0: Modifiable
1: Not modifiable
0
It is used to set whether the parameters are modifiable to avoid mal-function. If it is set to 0, all parameters
are modifiable. If it is set to 1, all parameters can only be viewed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A0-08
Individualized
parameter display
property
Unit's digit: User-defined param eter QUICK display
selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
Ten's digit: User-changed parameter QUICK display
selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
0
The setting of parameter display mode aims to facilitate you to view different types of parameters based on
actual requirements.
If one digit of A0-08 is set to 1, you can switch over to different parameter display modes by pressing key
“QUICK”. By default, only the “frequency inverter parameter” display mode is used.
The display codes of different parameter types are shown in the following table.
Table 6-10 Display codes of different parameter types
Parameter Type Display Code
Frequency inverter parameter display -dFLt
User-defined parameter display -user
User-changed parameter display -cHGd
The EM11 provides display of two types of individualized parameters: user-defined parameters and
user-modified parameters.
You-defined parameters are included in group “A1”. You can add a maximum of 32 parameters, convenient
for commissioning.
In user-defined parameter mode, symbol "u" is added before the function code. For example, b0-00 is
displayed as ub0-00.
In “User-changed parameter” mode, symbol "c" is added before the function code. For example, b0-00 is
displayed as cb0-00.
The User-changed parameters are grouped together in QUICK menu, which is convenient for on-site
troubleshooting.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A0-09
Restore default
settings
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings except motor parameters
and accumulation record.
2: Restore default settings for all parameters
3: Reserve
4: Clear records
Ohter: Reserve
0
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
123
0:No operation
1: Restore default settings except motor parameters
If A0-09 is set to 1, most function codes are restored to the default settings except motor parameters,
frequency command resolution (b0-11), fault records, accumulative running time (b9-09), accumulative
power-on time (b9-08) and accumulative power consumption (b9-10).
2: Restore default settings for all parameters, including motor parameters
3: Restore user backup parameters
If A0-09 is set to 3, the previous backup user parameters are restored (backup by setting A0-09=999).
4: Clear reco rds
If A0-09 is set to 4, the fault records, accumulative power-on time (b9-08), accumulative running time
(b9-09), and accumulative power consumption (b9-10) are cleared.
999: Back up present user parameters
If A0-09 is set to 999, the present parameter settings are backed up, helping you to restore the setting if
incorrect parameter setting is performed.
5.25 Group A1: User-Defined Function Codes
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
A1-00
User-defined function
code 0
User visible function codes
ub0.01
A1-01
User-defined function
code 1
User visible function codes
ub0.02
A1-02
User-defined function
code 2
User visible function codes
ub0.03
A1-03
User-defined function
code 3
User visible function codes
ub0.07
A1-04
User-defined function
code 4
User visible function codes
ub0.12
A1-05
User-defined function
code 5
User visible function codes
ub0.21
A1-06
User-defined function
code 6
User visible function codes
ub0.22
A1-07
User-defined function
code 7
User visible function codes
ub3.00
A1-08
User-defined function
code 8
User visible function codes
ub3.01
A1-09
User-defined function
code 9
User visible function codes
ub3.02
A1-10
User-defined function
code 10
User visible function codes
ub4.04
A1-11
User-defined function
code 11
User visible function codes
ub6.01
A1-12
User-defined function
code 12
User visible function codes
ub1.00
A1-13
User-defined function
code 13
User visible function codes
ub1.10
A1-14
User-defined function
User visible function codes
ud2.00
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
124
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
code 14
A1-15
User-defined function
code 15
User visible function codes
ud2.01
A1-16
User-defined function
code 16
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-17
User-defined function
code 17
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-18
User-defined function
code 18
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-19
User-defined function
code 19
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-20
User-defined function
code 20
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-21
User-defined function
code 21
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-22
User-defined function
code 22
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-23
User-defined function
code 23
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-24
User-defined function
code 24
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-25
User-defined function
code 25
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-26
User-defined function
code 26
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-27
User-defined function
code 27
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-28
User-defined function
code 28
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-29
User-defined function
code 29
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-30
User-defined function
code 30
User visible function codes
uA0.00
A1-31
User-defined function
code 31
User visible function codes
uA0.00
Group A1 is user-defined parameter group. You can select the required parameters from all EM11 functions
codes and add them into this group, convenient for view and modification.
Group A1 provides a maximum of 32 user-defined parameters. If "A1-00" is displayed, it indicates that
group A1 is null. After you enter user-defined function code mode, the displayed parameters are defined by
A1-00~ A1-31 and the sequence is consistent with that in group A1.
EM11 User’s Manual 6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility)
125
6. EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
6.1 Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the electromagnetic
interference environment and implement its function stably without interferences on the electromagnetic
environment.
6.2 EMC Standard Description
In accordance with the requirements of the national standard GB/T12668.3, the inverter needs to comply
with electromagnetic interference and anti-electromagnetic interference requirements.
The existing products of our company apply the latest international standard—IEC/EN61800-3: 2004
(Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods),
which is equivalent to the national standard GB/T12668.3.
IEC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and anti-electronic
interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference, conduction interference
and harmonics interference on the inverter (required for the inverter for civil use)Anti-electromagnetic
interference mainly tests the conduction interference rejection, radiation interference rejection, surge
interference rejection, fast and mutable pulse group interference rejection, ESD interference rejection and
power low frequency end interference rejection (specific test items including: 1. Interference rejection tests
of input voltage sag, interrupt and change; 2. Phase conversion interference rejection test; 3. Harmonic
input interference rejection test; 4. Input frequency change test; 5. Input voltage unbalance test; 6. input
voltage fluctuation test).
The tests shall be conducted strictly in accordance with the above requirements of IEC/ EN61800-3, and
the products of our company are installed and used according to Section 7.3 and have good electromagnetic
compatibility in general industry environment.
6.3 EMC Guide
6.3.1 Harmonic Effect
Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some places where mains quality is
rather poor, it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
6.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is interference of electromagnetic noise in the
surrounding environment on the inverter, and the other is interference of inverter on the surrounding
equipment.
Installation precautions:
1) The earth wires of the frequency inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded;
2) The power input and output power cables of the inverter and weak current signal cables (e.g. control
line) shall not be arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is preferable.
3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables or steel pipe
shielded cables and that the shielding layer be earthed reliably. The lead cables of the equipment
suffering interferences are recommended to employ twisted-pair shielded control cables, and the
6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility) EM11 User’s Manual
126
shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install output filter or reactor.
6.3.3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the
inverter
The electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated because plenty of relays, contactors and
electromagnetic brakes are installed near the inverter. When the inverter has error action due to the
interferences, the following measures can be taken:
1) Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference;
2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for the specific operations.
3) The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line employ shielded cable
and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
6.3.4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding
equipment
These interferences include two types: one is radiation interference of the inverter, and the other is
conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences cause the surrounding electric
equipment to suffer electromagnetic or electrostatic induction. The surrounding equipment hereby produces
error action. For different interferences, it can be handled by referring to the following methods:
1) For the measuring meters, receivers and sensors, their signals are generally weak. If they are placed
nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control cabinet, they are easy to suffer
interference and thus generate error actions. It is recommended to handle with the following methods:
Put in places far away from the interference source; do not arrange the signal cables with the power
cables in parallel and never bind them together; both the signal cables and power cables employ
shielded cables and are well earthed; install ferrite magnetic ring (with suppressing frequency of 30 to
1,000MHz) at the output side of the inverter and wind it 2 to 3 cycles; install EMC output filter in more
severe conditions.
2) When the equipment suffering interferences and the inverter use the same power supply, it may cause
conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove the interference, it shall install EMC filter
between the inverter and the power supply (refer to Section 7.3.6 for the prototyping operation); the
surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage
current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
3) The surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the
leakage current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
6.3.5 Leakage current and handling
There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage current to the earth, and the
other is leakage current between the cables.
1) Factors influencing the leakage current to the earth and the solutions:
There are distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The larger the distributed
capacitance is, the larger the leakage current will be. The distributed capacitance can be reduced by
effectively reducing the distance between the inverter and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency is,
the larger the leakage current will be. The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency.
However, reducing the carrier frequency may result in addition of motor noise. Note that additional
installation of reactor is also an effective method to remove the leakage current.
The leakage current may increase following the addition of circuit current. Therefore, when the motor
EM11 User’s Manual 6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility)
127
power is high, the corresponding leakage current will be high too.
2) Factors of producing leakage current between the cables and solutions:
There is distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the current passing the lines
has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus result in leakage current. If thermal relay is used, it
may generate error action.
The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is recommended that thermal
relay not be installed before the motor when using the inverter, and that electronic over current protection
function of the inverter be used instead.
6.3.6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply
1) When using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs to Classification I
electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and the metal ground of the installing
cabinet shall be well earthed and have good conduction continuity. Otherwise there may be danger of
electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
2) Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE end of the
inverter at the same public earth. Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
3) The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as possible.
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
128
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
7.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures
EM11 inverter has 35 types of warning information and protection function. In case of abnormal fault, the
protection function will be invoked, the inverter will stop output, and the faulty relay contact of the inverter
will start, and the fault code will be displayed on the display panel of the inverter. Before consulting the
service department, the user can perform self-check according to the prompts of this chapter, analyze the
fault cause and find out t solution. If the fault is caused by the reasons as described in the dotted frame,
please consult the agents of inverter or our company directly. Among the 35 types of warning information,
Err22 is hardware over current or over voltage signal. In most cases, the hardware over voltage fault will
cause Err22 alarm.
Table 7-1 Common faults and solution of the frequency inverter
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Inverter unit
protection
Err01
1: The output circuit is grounded or short
circuited.
2: The connecting cable of the motor is
too long.
3: The IGBT overheat.
4: The internal connections
b
ecome
loose.
5: The main control board is faulty.
6: The drive board is faulty.
7: The inverter IGBT is faulty.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Install a reactor or an output
filter.
3: Check the air filter and the
cooling fan.
4: Connect all cables properly.
5: Ask for technical support
6: Ask for technical support
7: Ask for technical support
Over current
during
acceleration
Err02
1: The output circuit is grounded or short
circuited.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
3: The acceleration time is too short.
4: Manual torque boost or V/F curve is
not appropriate.
5: The voltage is too low.
6: The startup operation is
p
erformed on
the rotating motor.
7: A sudden load is added during
acceleration.
8: The frequency inverter model is of too
small power class.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto- tuning.
3: Increase the acceleration time.
4: Adjust the manual torque boost
or V/F curve.
5: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
6: Select rotational speed tracking
restart or start the motor after it
stops.
7: Remove the added load.
8: Select a frequency inverter of
higher power class.
Over current
during
deceleration
Err03
1: The output circuit is grounded or short
circuited.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
3: The deceleration time is too short.
4: The voltage is too low.
5: A sudden load is added during
deceleration.
6: The braking unit and braking resistor
are not installed.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Increase the deceleration time.
4: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
5: Remove the added load.
6: Install the braking unit and
braking resistor.
EM11 User’s Manual 7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
129
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Over current
at constant
speed
Err04
1: The output circuit is grounded or short
circuited.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
3: The voltage is too low.
4: A sudden load is added during
operation.
5: The frequency inverter model is of too
small power class.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
4: Remove the added load.
5: Select an Frequency inverter of
higher power class.
Overvoltage
during
acceleration
Err05
1: The input voltage is too high.
2: An external force drives the motor
during acceleration.
3: The acceleration time is too short.
4: The braking unit and braking resistor
are not installed.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
2: Cancel the external force or
install a braking resistor.
3: Increase the acceleration time.
4: Install the braking unit and
braking resistor.
Overvoltage
during
deceleration
Err06
1: The input voltage is too high.
2: An external force drives the motor
during deceleration.
3: The deceleration time is too short.
4: The braking unit and braking resistor
are not installed.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
2: Cancel the external force or
install the braking resistor.
3: Increase the deceleration time.
4: Install the braking unit and
braking resistor.
Overvoltage
at constant
speed
Err07
1: The input voltage is too high.
2: An external force drives the motor
during deceleration.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
2: Cancel the external force or
install the braking resistor.
Control power
supply fault
Err08
The input voltage is not within the
allowable range.
Adjust the input voltage to the
allowable range.
Low voltage Err09
1: Instantaneous power failure occurs on
the input power supply.
2: The frequency inverter's input voltage
is not within the allowable range.
3: The DC bus voltage is abnormal.
4: The rectifier bridge and buffer resistor
are faulty.
5: The drive board is faulty.
6: The main control board is faulty.
1: Reset the fault.
2: Adjust the voltage to normal
range.
3: Ask for technical support
4: Ask for technical support
5: Ask for technical support
6: Ask for technical support
Frequency
inverter
overload
Err10
1: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor
occurs on the motor.
2: The frequency inverter model is of too
small power class.
1: Reduce the load and ch eck the
motor and mechanical condition.
2: Select a frequency inverter of
higher power class.
Motor
overload
Err11
1: bb-01 is set improperly.
2: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor
occurs on the motor.
3: The frequency inverter model is of too
small power class.
1: Set bb-01 correctly.
2: Reduce the load and ch eck the
motor and the mechanical
condition.
3: Select a frequency inverter of
higher power class.
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
130
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Power input
phase loss
Err12
1: The three-
p
hase power input is
abnormal.
2: The drive board is faulty.
3: The lightningproof board is faulty.
4: The main control board is faulty.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Ask for technical support.
3: Ask for technical support.
4: Ask for technical support.
Power output
phase loss
Err13
1: The cable connecting the frequency
inverter and the motor is faulty.
2: The frequency inverter's three-
p
hase
outputs are unbalanced when the motor is
running.
3: The drive board is faulty.
4: The IGBT module is faulty.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Check whether the motor three
phase winding is normal.
3: Ask for technical support.
4: Ask for technical support.
IGBT Module
overheat
Err14
1: The ambient temperature is too high.
2: The air filter is blocked.
3: The fan is damaged.
4: The thermally sensitive resistor of the
IGBT module is damaged.
5: The inverter IGBT module is
damaged.
1: Lower the ambient temperature.
2: Clean the air filter.
3: Replace the damaged fan.
4: Replace the damaged thermally
sensitive resistor.
5: Replace the inverter module.
External
equipment
fault
Err15
1: External fault signal is input via DI.
2: External fault signal is input via virtual
I/O.
1: Reset the operation.
2: Reset the operation.
Communicati
on fault
Err16
1: The host computer is in abnormal
state.
2: The communication cable is faulty.
3: The communication extension card is
set improperly.
4: The communication parameters in
group bA are set improperly.
1: Check the cabling of host
computer.
2: Check the communication
cabling.
3: Set the communication
extension card correctly.
4: Set the communication
parameters properly.
Contactor
fault
Err17
1: The drive board and power supply are
faulty.
2: The contactor is faulty.
1: Replace the faulty drive board
or power supply board.
2: Replace the faulty contactor.
Current
detection fault
Err18
1: The HALL device is faulty.
2: The drive board is faulty.
1: Replace the faulty HALL
device.
2: Re
p
lace the faulty drive board.
Motor
auto-tuning
fault
Err19
1: The motor parameters are not set
according to the nameplate.
2: The motor auto-tuning times out.
1: Set the motor parameters
according to the nameplate
properly.
2: Check the cable connecting the
Frequency inverter and the motor.
Encoder fault Err20
1: The encoder type is incorrect.
2: The cable connection of the encoder is
incorrect.
3: The encoder is damaged.
4: The PG card is faulty.
1: Set the encoder type correctly
based on the actual situation.
2: Eliminate external faults.
3: Replace the damaged encoder.
4: Replace the faulty PG card.
EEPROM
read- write
fault
Err21 The EEPROM chip is damaged. Replace the main control board.
EM11 User’s Manual 7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
131
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Frequency
inverter
hardware fault
Err22
1: Overvoltage exists.
2: Over current exists.
1: Handle based on over voltage.
2: Handle based on over current.
Short circuit
to ground
Err23
The motor is short circuited to the
ground.
Replace the cable or motor.
Accumulative
running time
reached
Err26
The accumulative running time reaches
the setting value.
Clear the record through
p
arameter
A0-09
User-defined
fault 1
Err27
1: The signal of user-defined fault 1 is
input via DI.
2:The signal of user-defined fault 1 is
input via virtual I/O.
1: Reset the operation.
2: Reset the operation.
User-defined
fault 2
Err28
1: The signal of user-defined fault 2 is
input via DI.
2:The signal of user-defined fault 2 is
input via virtual I/O.
1: Reset the operation.
2: Reset the operation.
Accumulative
power-on time
reached
Err29
The accumulative power-on time reaches
the setting value.
Clear the record through
p
arameter
A0-09
Off load Err30
The frequency inverter running current is
lower than the setting value.
Check that the load is
disconnected or the parameter
setting is correct.
PID feedback
lost during
running
Err31
The PID feedback is lower than the
setting of C0-26.
Check the PID feedback signal or
set C0-26 to a proper value.
By wave
current
limiting fault
Err40
1: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor
occurs on the motor.
2: The frequency inverter model is of too
small power class.
1: Reduce the load and ch eck the
motor and mechanical condition.
2: Select a frequency inverter of
higher power class.
Motor
switchover
fault during
running
Err41
Change the selection of the motor via
terminal during running of the frequency
inverter.
Perform motor switchover after
the frequency inverter stops.
Too l arge
speed
deviation
Err42
1: The encoder parameters are set
incorrectly.
2: The motor auto-tuning is not
performed.
3: The detection parameters of too large
speed deviation are set incorrectly.
1: Set the encoder parameters
properly.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Set the detection parameters
correctly based on the actual
situation.
Motor
over-speed
Err43
1: The encoder parameters are set
incorrectly.
2: The motor auto-tuning is not
performed.
3: The over-speed detection parameters
are set incorrectly.
1: Set the encoder parameters
properly.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Set the over-speed detection
p
arameters correctly based on the
actual situation.
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
132
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Motor
overheat
Err45
1: The cabling of the temperature sensor
becomes loose.
2: The motor temperature is too high.
1: Check the temperature sensor
cabling and eliminate the cabling
fault.
2: Lower the carrier frequency or
adopt other heat radiation
Initial position
fault
Err51
1: The motor
p
arameters are not too
deviation based on the actual situation.
1: Check that the motor parameters
are set correctly and whether the
setting of rated current is too
small.
7.2 Common Faults and Solutions
You may come across the following faults during the use of the frequency inverter. Refer to the following
table for simple fault analysis.
Table 8-2 Troubleshooting to common faults of the frequency inverter
SN Fault Po ssible Causes Solutions
1
There is no display at
power-on.
1: There is no power supply to the
frequency inverter or the power input to the
frequency inverter is too low.
2: The power supply of the switch on the
drive board of the frequency inverter is
faulty.
3: The rectifier bridge is damaged.
4: The control board or the operation panel
is faulty.
5: The cable connecting the control bo ard
and the drive board and the operation panel
loose or breaks.
1: Check the power supply.
2: Check the DC bus voltage.
3:Check the internal wiring plug
4: Change a keypad
5: Ask for technical support.
2
“-coc-” is displayed
at power-on.
1: The cable between the drive board and
the control board is in poor contact.
2: Related components on the control board
are damaged.
3: The motor or the motor ca ble is short
circuited to the ground.
4: The HALL device is faulty.
5: The power input to the frequency
inverter is too low.
1: Checking wiring
2: Ask for technical support.
3
“Err23” is displayed
at power-on.
1: The motor or the motor ou tput cable is
short-circuited to the ground.
2: The frequency inverter is damaged.
1: Measure the insulation of the
motor and the output cable with
a megger.
2: Ask for technical support.
4
The frequency
inverter display is
normal after
power-on. But
“coc-” is displayed
after running and
stops immediately.
1: The cooling fan is damaged or
locked-rotor occurs.
2: The external control terminal cable is
short circuited.
1: Replace the damaged fan.
2: Eliminate external fault.
EM11 User’s Manual
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
133
SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions
5
Err14 ( IGBT
module overheat)
fault is reported
frequently.
1: The setting of carrier frequ ency is too
high.
2: The cooling fan is damaged, or the air
filter is blocked.
3: Components inside the frequency
inverter are damaged (thermal coupler or
others).
1: Reduce the carrier frequency
(d6-00).
2: Replace the fan and clean the
air filter.
3: Ask for technical support.
6
The motor does not
rotate after the
frequency inverter
runs.
1: Check the motor and the motor ca bles.
2: The frequency inverter
p
arameters are set
improperly (motor parameters).
3: The cable between the drive board and
the control board is in poor contact.
4: The drive board is faulty.
1: Ensure the cable between the
Frequency inverter and the motor
is normal.
2: Replace the motor or clear
mechanical faults.
3: Check and re-set motor
parameters.
7
The DI terminals are
disabled.
1: The parameters are set incorrectly.
2: The external signal is incorrect.
3: The jumper bar across OP and+24 V
becomes loose.
4: The control board is faulty.
1: Check and reset the
parameters in group F4.
2: Re-connect the external signal
cables.
3: Re-confirm the jumper bar
across OP and +24 V.
4: Ask for technical support.
8
The motor speed is
always low in VC
mode.
1: The encoder is faulty.
2: The encoder cable is connected
incorrectly or in poor contact.
3: The PG card is faulty.
4: The drive board is faulty.
1: Replace the encoder and
ensure the cabling is proper.
2: Replace the PG card.
3: Ask for technical support.
9
The frequency
inverter reports over
current and
overvoltage
frequently.
1: The motor parameters are set improperly.
2: The acceleration/deceleration time is
improper.
3: The load fluctuates.
1: Re-set motor parameters or
re-perform the motor autotuning.
2: Set proper acceleration/
deceleration time.
3: Ask for technical support.
10
Err17 is reported of
power-on or running.
The soft startup contactor is not s ucked up.
1: Check whether the contactor
cable is loose.
2: Check whether the contactor
is faulty.
3: Check whether 24 V power
supply of the contactor is faulty.
4: Ask for technical support.
11
is displayed
of
p
ower-on.
Related component on the control board is
damaged.
Replace the control board.
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
134
Appendix I. Modbus communication protocol
EM11series of inverter provides RS485 communication interface, and adopts MODBUS communication
protocol. User can carry out centralized monitoring through PC/PLC to get operating requirements. And
user can set the running command, modify or read the function codes, the working state or fault
information of frequency inverter by Modbus communication protocol.
I. About Protocol
This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and use format in the series
communication and it includes master-polling (or broadcasting) format, master coding method and the
content includes function code of action, transferring data and error checking. The response of slave is the
same structure, and it includes action confirmation, returning the data and error checking etc. If slave takes
place the error while it is receiving the information or cannot finish the action demanded by master, it will
send one fault signal to master as a response.
II. Application Methods
The frequency inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” PC/PLC control net with
RS485 bus as the communication slave.
III. Bus structure
1) Hardware interface.
The “485+” and “485-“terminals on frequency inverter are the communication interfaces of Modbus
2) Topological mode
It is a “Single-master Multi-slave” system. In this network, every communication machine has a unique
slave address. One of them is as “master” (usually PC host machine, PLC and HMI, etc.), actively sends
out the communication, to read or write the parameters of slave. Other machines will be used as slave and
response to the inquiry/command from master. At one time only one machine can send the data and other
machines are in the receiving status. The setup range of slave address is 0 to 247. Zero refers to broadcast
communication address. The address of slave must is exclusive in the network.
3) Transmission mode
There provide asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. In the series asynchronous
communication, the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message. According to the Modbus-RTU
protocol, when the free time of no transmission in communication data lines is more than the transmission
time of 3.5byte, it indicates that a new start of communication frame.
EM11 series inverter has built-in the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, and is applicable to response
the slave “Inquiry/command” or doing the action according to the master’s “Inquiry / Command” and
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
135
response to the data.
Here, master is personnel computer (PC), industrial machine or programmable logical controller (PLC),
and the slave is inverter. Master not only visits some slave, but also sends the broadcast information to all
the slaves. For the single master “Inquiry/Command”, all of slaves will return a signal that is a response;
for the broadcast information provided by master, slave needs not feedback a response to master machine.
Communication data structure
Modbus protocol communication data format of EM11 series inverter is shown as following. The inverter
only support the reading and writing of Word type parameters, the corresponding reading operation
command is “0x03”, the writing operation command is “0x06”. The writing and reading operation of byte
or bit is not supported.
In theory, the host computer can continuously read several function codes once (that is, the maximum value
of “n” is 12), but note that not to jump across the last function code in this function group to avoid the
wrong reply.
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
136
If the wrong communication frame was detected by the salve or other reasons caused the failure of reading
and writing, the wrong frame will be replied.
RTU frame format
Frame start (START)
More than the 3.5- character time
Slave address(ADR)
Communication address:1 to 247(0: broadcast address)
Command code(CMD)
03: Read slave parameters
06: Write slave parameters
Function code address(H)
It indicates the external parameter address of frequency inverter in
hexadecimal format;
There are functional code or non-functional code (such as running state
parameter/ running command parameters) type parameters, for details
see the address definition.
During the transmission, high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the
back.
Function code address(L)
Number of function code(H)
It indicates the number of function code ready by the frame. If it is “1”,
then it indicates that it reads one function code. During the transmission,
high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the back.
Only one function code can be modified at one time without the field.
Number of function code(L)
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
137
Data(H) It indicates the replying data or the data waiting to write-in. During the
transmission, high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the back.
Data(L)
END
3.5- character time
CRC Checking
In RTU mode, messages include an error-checking field that is based on a CRC method. The CRC field
checks the contents of the entire message. The CRC field is two bytes, containing a16-bit binary value. The
CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving
device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message, and compares the calculated value to the actual
value it received in the CRC field.
If the two values are not equal, that means transmission is error
The CRC is started by 0xFFFF.Then a process begins of applying successive eight-bit bytes of the message
to the current contents of the register. Only the eight bits of data in each character are used for generating
the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do not apply to the CRC. During generation of the CRC,
each eight-bit character is exclusive ORed with the register contents. Then the result is shifted in the
direction of the least significant bit (LSB), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position.
The LSB is extracted and examined. If the LSB was a 1, the register is then exclusive ORed with a preset,
fixed value. If the LSB was a 0, no exclusive OR takes place. This process is repeated until eight shifts
have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next eight-bit byte is exclusive ORed with the
register's current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above. The final contents
of the register, after all the bytes of the message have been applied, is the CRC value.
When the CRC is appended to the message, the low-order byte is appended first, followed by the
high-order byte.
unsigned int crc_chk_value(unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while(length--)
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value&0x0001)
{
crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return(crc_value);
}
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
138
Definition of communication parameter address
Read and write function-code parameters (Some functional code is not changed, only for the manufacturer
use.)
The group number and mark of function code is the parameter address for indicating the rules.
High level bytes: Group A0~AF(GroupA0-A2/ Groupb0-bC), Groupb0-bF(Group C0-C6/Groupd0-d6),
70-7F(Group U)
Low level bytes: 00 to FF
For example: b0-03, address indicates to 0xA303.
Note: Group U: Only for reading parameter, cannot be changed parameters, some parameters cannot be
changed during operation, some parameters regardless of what kind of state the inverter in, the parameters
cannot be changed. Change the function code parameters, pay attention to the scope of the parameters, units,
and relative instructions.
Function code group Communication inquiry address
Inquiry address When
Communication mo difies RAM
A0~ A2 0xA000~ 0xA2FF 0x4000~ 0x42FF
b0~bC 0xA300~ 0xAFFF 0x4300~ 0x4FFF
C0~C6 0xb000~ 0xB7FF 0x5000~ 0x57FF
d0~d6 0xB800~ 0xBEFF 0x5800~ 0x5EFF
U0 0x7000~ 0x70FF
Besides, due to EEPROM be frequently stored, it will reduce the lifetime of EEPROM. In the
communication mode, and some function codes don’t have to be stored as long as change the RAM value.
Stop/start parameter
Parameter
address
Parameter description
Parameter
address
Parameter description
1000
Communication set value(-10000 ~
10000)(Decimal)
1010
PID setting
1001 Running frequency 1011 PID feedback
1002 DC Bus voltage 1012 PLC process
1003 Output voltage 1013 Pulse input frequency, unit: 0.01KHz
1004 Output current 1014 Feedback speed, unit:0.1Hz
1005
Output power
1015
Remaining running time
1006 Output torque 1016 Voltage before AI1correction
1007 Running spee
d
1017 Voltage before AI2correction
1008 DI input terminal 1018 Voltage before AI3correction
1009 DO output terminal 1019 Linear speed
100A AI1 voltage 101A Present power-on time
100B AI2 voltage 101B Present running time
100C AI3 voltage 101C Pulse input frequency, unit:1Hz
100D Counting value input 101D Communication setting value
100E Length value input 101E Actual feedback speed
100F Load speed 101F Main frequency X display
1020 Auxiliary frequency Y display
Note: Communication setting value is the percentage of relative value, 10000 corresponds to 100%, -10000
correspond to -100.00%.
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
139
Control command input frequency inverter: (write in only)
Command word address Command function
2000
0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Forward jog
0004: Reverse jog
0005: Free stop
0006:Decelarating stop
0007: Fault reset
Read inverter status: (read only)
Command word address Command function
3000
0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Stop
Parameter locking password collation: (If the feedback is the 8888H, it indicates the password collation
passed)
Password address Contents of input password
1F00 *****
Digital output terminal control: (write in only)
Address Of locking password command Contents of locking password command
2001
BIT0: DO1 output control
BIT1: DO2 output control
BIT2: Relay 1 output control
BIT3: Relay 2 output control
BIT4: FMR output control
BIT5: VDO1
BIT6: VDO2
BIT7: VDO3
BIT8: VDO4
BIT9: VDO5
Analog output AO1 control: (write in only)
Command word address Command function
2002 0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
Analog output AO2 control: (write in only)
Command word address Command function
2003 0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
140
Pulse output control: (write in only)
Command word address Command function
2004 0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
Inverter fault description:
Inverter fault
description
Inverter fault information
8000
0000: No fault
0001: Reserved
0002: acceleration over current
0003: deceleration over current
0004: Constant speed over current
0005: acceleration over voltage
0006: deceleration over voltage
0007:Constant speed over voltage
0008: Buffer resistor fault
0009: less voltage fault
000A:Frequency inverter overload
000B: Motor overload
000C: Input phase failure
000D: Output phase failure
000E: IGBT overheat
000F: External equipment fault
0010: Communication fault
0011: Contactor fault
0012: Current detection fault
0013: Motor auto-tuning fault
0014: Encoder/PG fault
0015: EEPROM read-write in fault
0016: Frequency inverter hardware fault
0017: Short circuit to ground fault
0018: Reversed
0019: Reversed
001A: Accumulative running time
reached
001B: User-defined fault 1
001C: User-defined fault 2
001D: Accumulative power-on time
reached
001E: Off load
001F: PID lost during running
0028: fast current limit fault
0029: Motor switchover fault during
running
002A: Too large speed deviation
002B: Motor over-speed
002D: Motor overheat
005A: Encode lines setting fault
005B: Not connect to the encoder
005C: Initial location fault
005E: Speed feedback fault
Group bA Communication parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-00
Communication type
selection
0: Modbus protocol 0
The EM11 now supports Modbus, later will add the communication protocol such as PROFIBUS-DP and
CANopen protocol. For details, see the description of “EM11 communication protocol”.
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
141
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-01 Baud ratio setting
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
7: 38400 BPS
5
This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate from host computer and the frequency inverter. Please
note that baud ratio of the host computer and the inverter should be consistent. Otherwise, the
communication is impossible. The higher the baud ratio is, the faster the communication is.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-02
Modbus Data format
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
0
The host computer and frequency inverter setup data format must be consistent, otherwise, communication
is impossible.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-03
Broadcast address
0~247 (0: Broadcast address)
0 is broadcast address
1
When the local address is set to 0, that is, broadcast address, it can realize the broadcast function of host
computer.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-04
Modbus response time
0~20 ms
Only valid for Modbus
2 ms
Response delay time: it refers to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to sending data
to the host machine. If the response time is less than the system processing time, then the response delay
time is based on the time delay of the system processing time. If the response delay time is more than the
system processing time, after the system processes the data, it should be delayed to wait until the response
delay time is reached, then sending data back to host machine.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-05
Communication
timeout
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus
0.0s
When the function is set to 0.0s, the communication interface timeout parameter is invalid.
When the function code is set to time value, if the interval time between the communication and the next
communication is beyond the communication timeout, the system will report communication failure error
(Err16). At normal circumstances, it will be set as invalid. If in the continuous communication system, set
this parameter, you can monitor the communication status.
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
142
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-06
Modbus protocol data
transmission format
selection
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol
1
bA-06=1: Select standard Modbus protocol.
bA-06=0: When reading the command, the slave machine return is one byte more than the standard
Modbus protocol’s, for details, refer to communication data structure of this protocol.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bA-07
Communication
reading current
resolution
0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
0
It is used to confirm the unit of current value when the communication reads the output current.
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
143
Appendix II. Function Code Table
If A0-00 is set to a non-zero number, parameter protection is enabled. You must write in correct user
password to enter the menu.
To cancel the password protection function, enter with password and set A0-00 to 0.
The user defined fast menu can directly enter without password.
Group “A” is frequency inverter system parameter. Group “b” is basic function parameters. Group “C” is
application parameter, Group “d” is control parameter, and Group “U” is monitoring function parameters.
The symbols in the function code table are described as follows:
"☆": The parameter can be modified when the frequency inverter is in stop or running state.
"★": The parameter cannot be modified when the frequency inverter is in running state.
"●": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
"*": The parameter is factory parameter and can be modified only by the manufacturer.
Standard Function Parameters
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
Group b0: Basic Function Parameters
b0-00 Motor type selection
Unit’s digit: Motor 1 selection
Ten’s digit: Motor 2 selection
0: AC asynchronous motor
1: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
00 ★
b0-01 Motor c ontrol mode
Unit's digit: Motor 1 control mode selectio n.
Ten's digit: Motor 2 control mode selection.
0: Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
2:V/F control
Hundred’s digit/Thousand’s digit: reserved
Ten thousand’s digit: Motor selection
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
00000 ★
b0-02
Command source
selection
0: Keypad control (LED off)
1: Terminal control (LED on)
2: Communication control (LE D blinking)
0 ★
b0-03
Main frequency source
X selection
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after
power off)
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power
off)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
0 ★
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
144
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b0-04
Auxiliary frequency
source Y selection
The same as b0-03 (Main frequency source
X selection)
1 ★
b0-05
Selection of auxiliary
frequency Y range
0: Relative to maximum frequency
1: Relative to main frequency X
0 ☆
b0-06
Range of auxiliary
frequency Y
0%~150% 100% ☆
b0-07
Frequency source
selection
Unit's digit: Frequency source selection.
0: Main frequency source X
1: X and Y calculation (calculation result
determined by ten's digit)
2: Switchover between X and Y
3: Switchover between X and "X and Y
calculation"
4: Switchover between Y and "X and Y
calculation"
Ten's digit: X and Y calculation relationship
0: X+Y
1: X-Y
2: Maximum of them
3: Minimum of them
0 ☆
b0-08
Frequency offset of
auxiliary frequency
source of X and Y
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 0.00 Hz ☆
b0-09
Binding command
source to frequency
source
Unit's digit: Binding keypad command to
following frequency source.
0: No binding
1: Frequency source by digital setting
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
Ten's digit: Binding terminal command to
frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Binding communication
command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Thousand’s digit: Automatically running
binding to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
0 ☆
b0-10
Record of digital setting
frequency of power
failure
0: not record
1:record
1 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
145
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b0-11 Frequency unit
1: 0.1 Hz
2: 0.01 Hz
2 ☆
b0-12 Preset frequency 0.00 ~ maximum freq uency (b0-13) 50.00 Hz ☆
b0-13 Maximum frequency 50. 00~3000.00 Hz 50.00 Hz ☆
b0-14
Source of frequency
upper limit
0: Set by (b0-15)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
b0-15 Frequency upper limit
Frequency lower limit (b0-17) ~ maximum
frequency (b0-13)
50.00 Hz ☆
b0-16
Frequency upper limit
offset
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 0.00 Hz ☆
b0-17 Frequency lower limit 0.00 Hz ~frequency upper limit(b0-15 ) 0.0 0 Hz ☆
b0-18 Rotation direction
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction
0 ☆
b0-19
Base frequency for UP/
DOWN modification
during running
0: Running frequency
1: Setting frequency
0 ★
b0-20
Acceleration/Decelerati
on mode
0: Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
0 ☆
b0-21 Acceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Model
dependent
☆
b0-22 Deceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Model
dependent
☆
b0-23
Time proportion of
S-curve start segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-24) 30.0% ☆
b0-24
Time proportion of
S-curve end segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-23) 30.0% ☆
b0-25
Acceleration/Decelerati
on time unit
0:1s
1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s
1 ☆
b0-26
Acceleration/Decelerati
on time base frequency
0: Maximum frequency (b0-13)
1: Set frequency
2: 100 Hz
0 ★
Group b1: Start and Stop Control Parameters
b1-00 Start mode
0: Direct start
1: Rotational speed tracking restart
2: Pre-excited start (AC asynchronous
motor)
0 ★
b1-01
Rotational speed
tracking mode
0: From frequency at stop
1: From zero speed
2: From maximum frequency
0 ★
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
146
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b1-02
Rotational speed
tracking speed
1~100 20 ★
b1-03 Startup frequency 0.00~10.00 Hz 0.00 Hz ☆
b1-04
Startup frequency
holding time
0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ★
b1-05
Startup DC braking
current/ Pre-excited
current
0%~100% 0% ★
b1-06
Startup DC braking
time/ Pre-excited time
0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ★
b1-07 Stop mode
0: Decelerate to stop
1: free stop
0 ☆
b1-08
DC braking initial
frequency of stopping
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
b1-09
DC braking waiting
time of stopping
0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ★
b1-10
DC braking current of
stopping
0%~100% 0% ★
b1-11
DC braking time of
stopping
0.0s~100.0s 0.0s ★
Group b2: Auxiliary Function
b2-00 JOG running frequency 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 6.00 Hz ☆
b2-01 JOG acceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-02 JOG deceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-03 Acceleration time 2 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-04 Deceleration time 2 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-05 Acceleration time 3 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-06 Deceleration time 3 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-07 Acceleration time 4 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-08 Deceleration time 4 0.0s~6500.0s
Model
dependent
☆
b2-09 Jump frequency 1 0.00 Hz ~maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-10 Jump frequency 2 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-11
Frequency jump
amplitude
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 0.00Hz ☆
b2-12
Jump frequency during
acceleration/
deceleration
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.00Hz
☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
147
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b2-13
Frequency switchover
point between
acceleration time 1 and
acceleration time 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-14
Frequency switchover
point between
deceleration time 1 and
deceleration time 2
0.00 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-15 Reverse running
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0 ☆
b2-16
Forward/Reverse
rotation dead-zone time
0.0~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b2-17
Running mode when set
frequency lower than
frequency lower limit
0: Run at frequency lower limit
1: Stop
2: Run at zero speed
0 ☆
b2-18 Droop control 0.00Hz~10.00 Hz 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-19 Terminal JOG prio rity
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 ☆
b2-20
Setting power-on time
reach threshold
0~65000 h 0 h ☆
b2-21
Setting running time
reach threshold
0~65000 h 0 h ☆
b2-22
Action after running
time reached
0: Continue to run
1: Stop
0 ☆
b2-23 Cooling fan control
0: Fan working during running
1: Fan working during power on
0 ☆
b2-24 Dormant frequency 0.00Hz ~wakeup frequency (b2-26) 0.00 Hz ☆
b2-25 Dormant delay time 0.0s~6000.0s 0.0s ☆
b2-26 Wakeup frequency
Dormant frequency (b2-24)~ maximum
frequency (b0-13)
0.00 Hz ☆
b2-27 Wakeup delay time 0.0s~6000.0s 0.0s ☆
b2-28 Timing function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 ☆
b2-29 Timing duration source
0: b2-30
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
(100% of analog input corresponds
to the value of b2-30)
0 ☆
b2-30 Timing du ration 0.0min~6500.0 min 0.0 min ☆
b2-31
This time running time
reached threshold
0.0min~6500.0 min 0.0 min ☆
b2-32 Startup protection
0: No
1: Yes
0 ☆
Group b3: Switch Input Terminal Paramete rs
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
148
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b3-00 DI1 function selection
0: No function
1: Forward RUN (FWD) or running
command
2: Reverse RUN (REV) or FWD/REV
running direction
3: Three-line control
4: Forward JOG (FJOG)
5: Reverse JOG (RJOG)
6: Multi-function terminal 1
7: Multi-function terminal 2
8: Multi-function terminal 3
9: Multi-function terminal 4
10: Terminal UP
11: Terminal DOWN
12: clear to zero of UP and DOWN setting
(terminal, keypad)
13: Terminal 1 for acceleration/ deceler ation
time selection
14: Terminal 2 for acceleration/ deceler ation
time selection
15: Frequency source switchover
16: Switchover between main frequency
source X and preset frequency
17: Switchover between auxiliary frequency
source Y and preset frequency
18:Terminal 1 for Command source
switchover
19: Terminal 2 for Command source
switchover
20: Speed control/Torque control switchover
21: Torque control prohibited
22: PID pause
23: PID integral pause
24: Reverse PID action direction
25: PID parameter switchover
26: PLC status reset
27: Swing pause
28: Counter input
29: Counter reset
30: Length count input
31: Length reset
32: Pulse input (enabled only for HDI)
33: Frequency modification enable
34:Acceleration/Deceleration p rohibited
35: Motor selection terminal 1
36: Motor selection terminal 2(reserve)
37: Fault reset
1 ★
b3-01 DI2 function selection 4 ★
b3-02 DI3 function selection 9 ★
b3-03 DI4 function selection 12 ★
b3-04 DI5 function selection 13 ★
b3-05
DI6/HDI function
selection
32 ★
b3-06
DI7 function
selection(extend)
0 ★
b3-07
DI8 function
selection(extend)
0 ★
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
149
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b3-08
DI9 function
selection(extend)
38: Normally open (NO) input of externa l
fault
39: Normally closed (NC) inpu t of external
fault
40: User-defined fault 1
41: User-defined fault 2
42: Running pause
43: Free stop
44: Emergency stop
45: External STOP terminal 1
46: External STOP terminal 2
47: Deceleration DC braking
48: Immediate DC braking
49: Clear the current running time
0 ★
b3-09
DI10 function
selection(extend)
0 ★
b3-10
DI11 function
selection(extend)
(extend)
0 ★
b3-11
DI12 function
selection(extend)
0 ★
b3-12 DI filter time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010s ☆
b3-13
Terminal command
mode
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
2: Three-line mode 1
3: Three-line mode 2
0 ★
b3-14
Terminal UP/DOWN
rate
0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s 0. 100 Hz/s ☆
b3-15 DI1 ON delay time 0.0 s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-16 DI1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-17 DI2 ON delay time 0.0 s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-18 DI2 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-19 DI3 ON delay time 0.0 s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-20 DI3 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-21 DI4 ON delay time 0.0 s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-22 DI4 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-23 DI5 ON delay time 0.0 s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-24 DI5 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b3-25 DI valid selection 1
Unit's digit: DI1 valid mode.
0: Low level valid
1: High level valid
Ten's digit: DI2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI3 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI4 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000 ★
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
150
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b3-26 DI valid selection 2
Unit's digit: DI6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI7 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI8 state.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI9 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI10 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000 ★
b3-27 DI valid selection 3
Unit's digit: DI11 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI12 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00 ★
Group b4: Switch Signal output Terminals
b4-00
FM terminal output
mode
0: Pulse output (FMP)
1: Switch signal output (FMR)
1 ☆
b4-01
FMR function (open-
collector output
terminal)
0: No output
1: Ready signal
2: Frequency inverter running
3: Fault output (free stop fault)
4: Fault output (free stop fault, but do not
output when lower voltage)
5: Swing frequency limit
6: Torque limit
7: Frequency upper limit reached
8:Frequency lower limit reached (relevant to
running)
9: Frequency lower limit reached (having
output at stop)
10: Reverse running
11: Zero-speed running (no output at stop)
12: Zero-speed running 2 (having output at
stop)
13: Preset count value reached
14: Designated count value reached
15: Length reached
16: PLC cycle complete
17: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
18: Frequency level detection FDT2 output
19: Frequency reached
20: Frequency 1 reached
21: Frequency 2 reached
22: Current 1 reached
23: Current 2 reached
24: Module temperature reached
25: Timing reached
0 ☆
b4-02
Relay 1 function
(TA-TB-TC)
2 ☆
b4-03 Reserved ☆
b4-04
DO1 function selection
(open-collector output
terminal)
1 ☆
b4-05 DO2 function(extend) 0 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
151
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b4-06 DO3 function(extend)
26: Zero current state
27: Output current exceeded limitation
28: Lower voltage state output
29: Frequency inverter overload pre-warning
30: Motor overheat pre-warning
31: Motor overload pre-warning
32: off load
33: AI1 larger than AI2
34: AI1 input exceeded limitation
35: Alarm output (all faults)
36: Present running time reached
37: Accumulative power-on time reached
38: Accumulative running time reached
0 ☆
b4-07 DO4 function(extend) 0 ☆
b4-08 DO5 function(extend) 0 ☆
b4-09 DO6 function(extend) 0 ☆
b4-10 FMR ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-11 FMR OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-12 Relay 1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-13 Relay 1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-16 DO1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-17 DO1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-18 DO2 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-19 DO2 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b4-20 DO logic selection 1
Unit's digit: FMR valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: Relay 1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: Relay 2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: DO2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
00000 ☆
b4-21 DO logic selection 2
Unit's digit: DO3 valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: D04 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: DO5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: reserved
00000 ☆
b4-22
Frequency detection
value (FDT1)
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency 5 0.00 Hz ☆
b4-23
Frequency detection
hysteresis (FDT
hysteresis 1)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level) 5.0% ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
152
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b4-24
Frequency detection
value (FDT2)
0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency 5 0.00 Hz ☆
b4-25
Frequency detection
hysteresis (FDT
hysteresis 2)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 level) 5.0% ☆
b4-26
Detection amplitude of
frequency reached
0.00~100% (maximum frequency) 3.0% ☆
b4-27
Any frequency reaching
detection value 1
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz ☆
b4-28
Any frequency reaching
detection amplitude 1
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 3.0% ☆
b4-29
Any frequency reaching
detection value 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz ☆
b4-30
Any frequency reaching
detection amplitude 2
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 3.0% ☆
b4-31
Zero current detection
level
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 5.0% ☆
b4-32
Zero current detection
delay time
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s ☆
b4-33
Over current output
threshold
0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) 200.0% ☆
b4-34
Over current output
detection delay time
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s ☆
b4-35 Any current reaching 1 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 100.0% ☆
b4-36
amplitude of any current
reaching 1
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 3.0% ☆
b4-37 Any current reaching 2 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 100.0% ☆
b4-38
Amplitude of any
current reaching 2
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 3.0% ☆
b4-39
Module temperature
threshold
25~100°C 75°C ☆
Group b5: Pulse/Analog input te rminals
b5-00
Pulse minimum
input(HDI6)
0.00 kHz ~b5-02 0.00 kHz ☆
b5-01
Corresponding setting
of pulse minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 0.00% ☆
b5-02 Pulse maximum input b5-00 ~ 50.00 kHz 50.00 kHz ☆
b5-03
Corresponding setting
of pulse maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 100.0% ☆
b5-04 Pulse filter time 0.00s~10.00s 10.00s ☆
b5-05
AI1 input voltage lower
limit of protection
0.00 V~ b5-06 3.10 V ☆
b5-06
AI1 input voltage upper
limit of protection
b5-05~10.00 V 6.80 V ☆
b5-07
AI1input minimum
value
0.00 V ~ b5-15 0.00 V ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
153
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b5-08
Corresponding setting
of AI1 minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-09
Second point input
value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V 2.50V ☆
b5-10
Corresponding setting
of second point input
value of AI1
-100.0% ~100.0% 25.0% ☆
b5-11
Third point input value
of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V 5.00V ☆
b5-12
Corresponding setting
of third point input
value of AI1
-100.0% ~100.0% 50.0% ☆
b5-13
Fourth point input value
of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V 7.50V ☆
b5-14
Corresponding setting
of fourth point input
value of AI1
-100.0% ~100.0% 75.0% ☆
b5-15
AI1 input maximum
value
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 10.00 V ☆
b5-16
Corresponding setting
of AI1 maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 100.0% ☆
b5-17 AI1input filter time 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ☆
b5-18
Jump point of AI1 input
corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-19
Jump amplitude of
AI1input corresponding
setting
0.0%~100.0% 0.5% ☆
b5-20 AI2 minimum input 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 0.00 V ☆
b5-21
Corresponding setting
of AI2 minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-22
Second point input
value of AI2
0.00 V ~10.00 V 2.50V ☆
b5-23
Corresponding setting
of second point input
value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0% 25.0% ☆
b5-24
Third point input value
of AI2
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 5.00V ☆
b5-25
Corresponding setting
of third point input
value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0% 50.0% ☆
b5-26
Fourth point input value
of AI2
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 7.50V ☆
b5-27
Corresponding setting
of fourth point input
value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0% 75.0% ☆
b5-28 AI2 maximum input 0.00V~ 10.00 V 10.00 V ☆
b5-29 Corresponding setting -100.00%~100.0% 100.0% ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
154
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
of AI2 maximum input
b5-30 AI2 input filter time 0.00s~10.00s 0.10s ☆
b5-31
Jump point of AI2 input
corresponding setting
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-32
Jump amplitude of AI2
input corresponding
setting
0.0% ~100.0% 0.5% ☆
b5-33 AI3 minimum input 0.00 V~10.00 V 0.00 V ☆
b5-34
Corresponding setting
of AI3 minimum input
-100.00%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-35
Second point input
value of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 2.50V ☆
b5-36
Corresponding setting
of second point input
value of AI3
-100.00% ~100.0% 25.0% ☆
b5-37
Third point input value
of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 5.00V ☆
b5-38
Corresponding setting
of third point input
value of AI3
-100.00% ~100.0% 50.0% ☆
b5-39
Fourth
p
oint input value
of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 7.50V ☆
b5-40
Corresponding setting
of fourth point
-100.00% ~100.0% 75.0% ☆
b5-41 AI3 maximum input 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V 10.00 V ☆
b5-42
Corresponding setting
of AI3 maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0% 100.0% ☆
b5-43 AI3 filter time 0.00~10.00s 0.10s ☆
b5-44
Jump point of AI3 input
corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b5-45
Jump amplitude of AI3
input corresponding
setting
0.0% ~100.0% 0.5% ☆
Group b6: Pulse/Analog Output Terminals
b6-00 FMP function selection
0: Running frequency corresponding to
0~Max. operation frequency
1: Set frequency corresponding to 0~Max.
operation frequency
2: Output current corresponding to
0~Doubled motor rated current
3: Output torque (absolute value)
corresponding to 0~double rated torque
4: Output power corresponding to
0~Doubled motor rated power
5: Output voltage corresponding to 0~1.2
times DC bus voltage
0 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
155
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b6-01
AO1 output function
selection
6: Motor rotational speed corresponding to
0~Max. operation frequency
7: Output current corresponding to 0~1 000A
8: Output voltage corresponding to 0~1000V
9: Output torque corresponding to
(-200%~200%) motor rated torque
10: Pulse input corresponding to
0Hz~100kHz
11: AI1 corresponding to 0~10V
12: AI2 corresponding to 0~10V
13: AI3 corresponding to 0~10V
14: Length corresponding to 0~Length
setting value
15: Count value corresponding to 0~Count
setting value
16: Communication setting corresponding to
0~32767
0 ☆
b6-02
AO2 output function
selection
1 ☆
b6-03
Maximum FMP output
frequency
0.01 kHz ~50.00 kHz 50.00 kHz ☆
b6-04 AO1 offset coefficient -100.0% ~100.0% 0.0% ☆
b6-05 AO1 gain -10.00~10.00 1.00 ☆
b6-06 AO2 offset coefficient -100.0% ~100.0% 0.00% ☆
b6-07 AO2 gain -10. 00 ~10.00 1.00 ☆
Group b7 : Virtual DI (VDI)/Virtual DO (VDO)
b7-00 VDI1 function sele ction 0~49 0 ★
b7-01 VDI2 function sele ction 0~49 0 ★
b7-02 VDI3 function sele ction 0~49 0 ★
b7-03 VDI4 function sele ction 0~49 0 ★
b7-04 VDI5 function sele ction 0~49 0 ★
b7-05 VDI state setting mode
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Valid decided by state of VDOx
1: Valid decided by b7-06
Ten's digit: VDI2.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
00000 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
156
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b7-06 VDI state setting
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: VDI2
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
00000 ☆
b7-07
Function selection for
AI1 used as DI
0~49 0 ★
b7-08
Function selection for
AI2 used as DI
0~49 0 ★
b7-09
Function selection for
AI3 used as DI
0~49 0 ★
b7-10
Valid state selection for
AI used as DI
Unit's digit: AI1.
0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
Ten's digit: AI2.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: AI3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
0 ☆
b7-11
VDO1 function
selection
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
38 ☆
b7-12
VDO2 function
selection
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
38 ☆
b7-13
VDO3 function
selection
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
38 ☆
b7-14
VDO4 function
selection
0:connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
38 ☆
b7-15
VDO5 function
selection
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
38 ☆
b7-16 VDO1 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b7-17 VDO2 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b7-18 VDO3 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b7-19 VDO4 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
b7-20 VDO5 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s 0.0s ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
157
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b7-21
VDO valid state
selection
Unit's digit: VDO1.
0: Positive logic valid
1: Reverse logic valid
Ten's digit: VDO2
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: VDO3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Thousand's digit: VDO4.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Ten thousand's digit: VDO5.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
00000 ☆
Group b8: AI/AO Correction
b8-00
Ideal voltage of AI1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-01
Sampling voltage of
AI1 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-02
Ideal voltage of AI1
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-03
Sampling voltage of
AI1 calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-04
Ideal voltage of AI2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-05
Sampling voltage of
AI2 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-06
Ideal voltage of AI2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-07
Sampling voltage of
AI2 calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-08
Ideal voltage of AI3
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-09
Sampling voltage of
AI3 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-10
Ideal voltage of AI3
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-11
Sampling voltage of
AI3 calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-12
Ideal voltage of AO1
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-13
Measured voltage of
AO1 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-14
Ideal voltage of AO1
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-15
Measured voltage of
AO1calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-16
Ideal voltage of AO2
calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
158
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b8-17
Measured voltage of
AO2 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V 2.000V ☆
b8-18
Ideal voltage of AO2
calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
b8-19
Measured voltage of
AO2 calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V 8.000V ☆
Group b9: Keypad and Display
b9-00
STOP/RESET key
function
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in
operation panel control
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any
operation mode
0 ☆
b9-01
MF.K Key function
selection
0: MF.K key disabled
1: Switchover between operation panel
control and remote command control
(terminal or communication)
2: Switchover between forward rotation and
reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
0 ☆
b9-02
LED display running
parameters 1
0000~FFFF
Bit00: Running frequency 1 (Hz)
Bit01: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit02: DC Bus voltage (V)
Bit03: Output voltage (V)
Bit04: Output current (A)
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
Bit07: DI input status
Bit08: DO output status
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit10: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit11: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit12: Count value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
Bit15: PID setting
0x1f ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
159
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
b9-03
LED display running
parameters 2
0000~FFFF
Bit00: PID feedback
Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)
Bit04: Remaining running time
Bit05: AI1 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit06: AI2 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit07: AI3 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit08: Linear speed
Bit09: present power-on time (Hour)
Bit10: present running time (Min)
Bit11: Heat sink temperature display (℃)
Bit12: Communication setting value
Bit13: Encoder feedback frequency (Hz)
Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)
Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display (Hz)
0x0800 ☆
b9-04
LED display parameter
of stopping
0000~FFFF
Bit00: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Bus voltage (V)
Bit02: DI input status
Bit03: DO output status
Bit04: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit05: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit06: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit07: Count value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed
Bit11: PID setting
Bit12: Pulse setting frequenc y(kHz)
Bit13:Heatsink temperature display(°C)
0x2033 ☆
b9-05
Load speed display
coefficient
0.0001~ 6.5000 1.0000 ☆
b9-06
Number of decimal
places for load speed
display
0: 0 decimal display
1: 1 decimal display
2: 2 decimal display
3: 3 decimal display
1 ☆
b9-07 Heatsink temperature 0.0°C ~100.0°C 0°C ☆
b9-08
Accumulative power-on
time
0~65535 h 0 h ●
b9-09
Accumulative running
time
0~65535 h 0 h ●
b9-10
Accumulative power
consumption
0~65535 kWh 0 kWh ●
Group bA: Communication Parameters
bA-00
Communication type
selection
0: Modbus protocol 0 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
160
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
bA-01 Baud ratio setting
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
7: 38400 BPS
5 ☆
bA-02 Modbus Data format
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
0 ☆
bA-03 Broadcast address
0~247 (0: Broadcast address)
Valid for Modbus
1 ☆
bA-04 Modbus response delay
0~20 ms
Only valid for Modbus
2 ms ☆
bA-05 Communication timeout
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus
0.0s ☆
bA-06
Modbus protocol data
transmission format
selection
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol
1 ☆
bA-07
Communication reading
current resolution
0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
0 ☆
Group bb: Fault and Protection Setting
bb-00 G/P type selection
0: P type
1: G type
1 ☆
bb-01
Motor overload
protection selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
☆
bb-02
Motor overload
protection gain
0.20~10.00 1.00 ☆
bb-03
Motor overload
pre-warning coefficient
50%~100% 80% ☆
bb-04 Overvoltage stall gain 0~100 0 ☆
bb-05
Overvoltage stall
protective voltage
120%~150% 130% ☆
bb-06 Over current stall gain 0~100 20 ☆
bb-07
Over current stall
protective current
100%~200% 150% ☆
bb-08
Protection of
short-circuit to ground
after power-on
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
☆
bb-09 Fault auto reset times 0~99 0 ☆
bb-10
Relay action selection
during fault auto reset
0: Not act
1: Act
0
☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
161
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
bb-11
Time interval of fault
auto reset
0.1s~100.0s 1.0s ☆
bb-12
Input phase loss
protection/contactor
energizing protection
selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 ☆
bb-13
Output phase loss
protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 ☆
bb-14 Off load protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 ☆
bb-15 Off load detection level 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) 1.0% ☆
bb-16 Off load detection time 0.0s~60.0s 1.0s ☆
bb-17
Over-speed detection
value
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
bb-18
Over-speed detection
time
0.0s~60.0s 1.0s ☆
bb-19
Detection value of too
large speed deviation
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
bb-20
Detection time of too
large speed deviation
0.0s~60.0s 5.0s ☆
bb-21
Action selection at
instantaneous power
failure
0: Invalid
1: Decelerate
2: Decelerate to stop
0 ☆
bb-22
Voltage rally judging
time at instantaneous
power failure
0.00s ~100.00s 0.00s ☆
bb-23
Judging voltage of
instantaneous power
failure
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage) 80.0% ☆
bb-24
Judging voltage of
instantaneous power
failure restoring
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage) 90.0% ☆
bb-25
Type of motor
temperature sensor
0: No temperature sensor
1: PT100
2: PT1000
0 ☆
bb-26
Motor overheat
protection threshold
0°C~200°C 120°C ☆
bb-27
Motor overheat
pre-warning threshold
0°C~200°C 100°C ☆
bb-28 Overvoltage th reshold 200.0~2500.0 V 830.0 V ☆
bb-29 Under voltage threshold 50.0%~150.0% 100.0% ☆
bb-30 Brake unit use ratio 0%~100% 100% ☆
bb-31 Rapid current limit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
162
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
bb-32
Fault protection action
selection 1
Unit's digit: Motor overload, Err11.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten's digit: Power input phase loss, Err12.
Same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Power output phase loss,
Err13.
Same as unit's digit
Thousand's digit: External equipment fault,
Err15.
Same as unit's digit
Ten thousand's digit: Communication fault,
Err16.
Same as unit's digit
00000 ☆
bb-33
Fault protection action
selection 2
Unit's digit: Encoder/PG card fault, Err20.
0: Free stop
Ten's digit: EEPROM read-write fault,
Err21.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
Hundred's digit : Reserved
Thousand's digit: Motor Overheat, Err25.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten thousand's digit: Running time reached,
Err26.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000 ☆
bb-34
Fault protection action
selection 3
Unit's digit: User-defined fau lt 1,Err27.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: User-defined fault 2,Err28.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Accumulative power-on
time reached,Err29.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Thousand's digit: Off load, Err30.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: reduce to 7% of rated motor frequency
and continue running. If the load recovers
and it will auto regain to setting freque ncy.
Ten thousand's digit: PID feedback lost
during running, Err31.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
163
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
bb-35
Fault protection action
selection 4
Unit's digit: Speed deviation too large, Err42
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: Motor over-speed, Err43.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Initial position fault, Err51.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
00000 ☆
bb-36
Frequency selection for
continuing to run of
fault
0: Current running frequency
1: Set frequency
2: Frequency upper limit
3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency of abnormality (bb-37)
0 ☆
bb-37
Backup frequency of
abnormality
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 1.0% ☆
Group bC: Fault diagnosis
bC-00 1st fault type – – ●
bC-01 2nd fault type – – ●
bC-02 3rd fault type (latest) – – ●
bC-03 Frequency of latest fault – – ●
bC-04 Current of latest fau lt – – ●
bC-05
DC Bus voltage of latest
fault
– – ●
bC-06
Input terminals status of
latest fault
– – ●
bC-07
Output terminal status
of latest fault
– – ●
bC-08
Frequency inverter
status of latest fault
– – ●
bC-09
Power-on time of latest
fault
– – ●
bC-10
Running time of latest
fault
– – ●
bC-11 Frequency of 2nd fault – – ●
bC-12 Current of 2nd fault – – ●
bC-13
DC Bus voltage of 2nd
fault
– – ●
bC-14
Input terminal status of
2nd fault
– – ●
bC-15
Output terminal status
of 2nd fault
– – ●
bC-16
Frequency inverter
status of 2nd fault
– – ●
bC-17
Power-on time of 2nd
fault
– – ●
bC-18
Running time of 2nd
fault
– – ●
bC-19 Frequency of 1st fault – – ●
bC-20 Current of 1st fault – – ●
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
164
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
bC-21
DC Bus voltage of 1st
fault
– – ●
bC-22
Input terminal status of
1st fault
– – ●
bC-23
Output terminal status
of 1st fault
– – ●
bC-24
Frequency inverter
status of 1st fault
– –
bC-25
Power-on time of 1st
fault
– – ●
bC-26
Running time of 1st
fault
– – ●
Group C0: PID Control Function
C0-00 PID setting sourc e
0: C0-01
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-function
0 ☆
C0-01 PID digital setting 0.0%~100.0% 50.0% ☆
C0-02 PID setting change time 0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ☆
C0-03 PID feedback source
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (HDI)
4: AI1 – AI2
5: AI1 + AI2
6: MAX (|AI1|, |AI2|)
7: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: Communication setting
0 ☆
C0-04 PID action direction
0: Forward action
1: Reverse action
0 ☆
C0-05
PID setting feedback
range
0~65535 1000 ☆
C0-06 Proportional gain KP1 0.00~10.0 20.0 ☆
C0-07 Integral time TI1 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ☆
C0-08 Differential time TD1 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ☆
C0-09 Proportional gain KP2 0.00~10.00 20.0 ☆
C0-10 Integral time TI2 0.01s~10.00s 2.00s ☆
C0-11 Differential time TD2 0.00s~10.00s 0.000s ☆
C0-12
PID parameter
switchover condition
0: No switchover
1: Switchover via DI
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
0 ☆
C0-13
PID parameter
switchover deviation 1
0.0% ~ C0-14 20.0% ☆
C0-14 PID p arameter C0-13 ~ 100.0% 80.0% ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
165
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
switchover deviation 2
C0-15 PID integral property
Unit's digit: Integral separated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: Whether to stop integral
operation when the output rea ches the limit.
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
00 ☆
C0-16 PID initial value 0.0%~100.0% 0. 0% ☆
C0-17
PID initial value
holding time
0.00s~650.00s 0.00s ☆
C0-18
Frequency upper limit
of PID reverse rotation
0.00 ~ maximum frequency 2.00 Hz ☆
C0-19 PID deviation limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C0-20 PID differential limit 0.00%~100.00% 0.10% ☆
C0-21
Maximum positive
deviation between two
PID outputs
0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ☆
C0-22
Maximum negative
deviation between two
PID outputs
0.00%~100.00% 1.00% ☆
C0-23 PID feedback filter time 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ☆
C0-24 PID output filter time 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s ☆
C0-25
Detection value of PID
feedback loss
0.0%: Not judging feedback loss
0.1%~100.0%
0.0% ☆
C0-26
Detection time of PID
feedback loss
0.0s~20.0s 0.0s ☆
C0-27 PID operation at stop
0: No PID operation at stop
1: PID operation at stop
0 ☆
Group C1: Multi-function
C1-00 Multi-function 0 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-01 Multi-function 1 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-02 Multi-function 2 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-03 Multi-function 3 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-04 Multi-function 4 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-05 Multi-function 5 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-06 Multi-function 6 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-07 Multi-function 7 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-08 Multi-function 8 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-09 Multi-function 9 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-10 Multi-function 10 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-11 Multi-function 11 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-12 Multi-function 12 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-13 Multi-function 13 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-14 Multi-function 14 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-15 Multi-function 15 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C1-16 Multi-function 0 source 0: Set by C1-00 0 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
166
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: PID
6: Set by preset frequency (b0-12), modified
via terminal UP/ DOWN
Group C2: Simple PLC
C2-00
Simple PLC running
mode
0: Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one
cycle
1: Keep final values after the f requency
inverter runs one cycle
2: Repeat after the frequency inverter runs
one cycle
0 ☆
C2-01
Simple PLC record
selection
Unit's digit: Record of power failure.
0: no record after power off
1: record after power off
Ten's digit: Record of stopping.
0: no record after stopping
1:record after stopping
00 ☆
C2-02
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 0
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-03
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 0
0~3 0 ☆
C2-04
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 1
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-05
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 1
0~3 0 ☆
C2-06
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 2
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-07
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 2
0~3 0 ☆
C2-08
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 3
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-09
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 3
0~3 0 ☆
C2-10
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 4
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-11
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 4
0~3 0 ☆
C2-12
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 5
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
167
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
C2-13
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 5
0~3 0 ☆
C2-14
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 6
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-15
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 6
0~3 0 ☆
C2-16
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 7
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-17
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 7
0~3 0 ☆
C2-18
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 8
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-19
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 8
0~3 0 ☆
C2-20
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 9
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-21
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 9
0~3 0 ☆
C2-22
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 10
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-23
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 10
0~3 0 ☆
C2-24
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 11
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-25
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 11
0~3 0 ☆
C2-26
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 12
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-27
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 12
0~3 0 ☆
C2-28
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 13
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-29
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 13
0~3 0 ☆
C2-30
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 14
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-31
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
0~3 0 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
168
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
Segment 14
C2-32
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 15
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s (h) ☆
C2-33
Acceleration/deceleratio
n time of simple PLC
Segment 15
0~3 0 ☆
C2-34
Time unit of simple
PLC running
0: s (second)
1: h (hour)
0 ☆
Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
C3-00
Swing frequency setting
mode
0: Relative to the central frequency
1: Relative to the maximum frequency
0 ☆
C3-01
Swing frequency
amplitude
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
C3-02
Textile jump frequency
amplitude of Swing
running
0.0%~50.0% 0.0% ☆
C3-03 Swing frequency cycle 0.1s~3000.0s 10.0s ☆
C3-04
Triangular wave rising
time coefficient
0.1%~100.0% 50.0% ☆
C3-05 Set length 0m~65535 m 1000 m ☆
C3-06 Actual length 0m~65535 m 0 m ☆
C3-07
Number of pulses per
meter
0.1~6553.5 100.0 ☆
C3-08 Set count value 1~65535 1000 ☆
C3-09 Designated count value 1~65535 1000 ☆
Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters
d0-00 Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Model
dependent
★
d0-01 Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Model
dependent
★
d0-02 Rated motor current
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
≤55 kW)
0.1A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-03 Rated motor frequenc y 0.01 Hz~ maximum frequenc y 50.00Hz ★
d0-04
Rated motor rotational
speed
1rpm~65535rpm
Model
dependent
★
d0-05
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-06
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-07
Leakage inductive
reactance (asynchronous
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
Model
dependent
★
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
169
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
motor) 0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
d0-08
Mutual inductive
reactance (asynchronous
motor)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-09
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
0.01A ~ d0-02 (Frequency inverter power
≤55 kW)
0.1A to d0-02 (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-15
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~ 6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-16
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.001~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-17
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.001 mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d0-18
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
0.1V~6553.5 V
Model
dependent
★
d0-19
Encoder pulses per
revolution
1~32767 1024 ★
d0-20 Encoder type
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver
2: UVW incremental encoder
3: Reserved
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
0 ★
d0-21
A/B phase sequence of
ABZ incremental
encoder
0: Forward
1: Reserve
0 ★
d0-22
Encoder installation
angle
0.0°~359.9° 0.0° ★
d0-23
U, V, W phase sequence
of UVW encoder
0: Forward
1: Reverse
0 ★
d0-24
UVW encoder angle
offset
0.0°~359.9° 0.0° ★
d0-28
Number of pole pairs of
resolver
1~99 1 ★
d0-29
Encoder wire-break
fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s
0.0s ★
d0-30
Motor 1 auto-tuning
selection
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete
0 ★
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
170
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load
auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
Group d1: Vector Control Parameters
d1-00
Speed/Torque control
selection
0: Speed control
1: Torque control
0 ★
d1-01
Speed loop proportional
gain 1(Kp1)
0.01~10.00 0.30 ☆
d1-02
Speed loop integral time
1(Ti1)
0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ☆
d1-03 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 ~ d1-06 5.00 Hz ☆
d1-04
Speed loop proportional
gain 2(KP2)
0.01~10.00 0.20 ☆
d1-05
Speed loop integral time
2(Ti2)
0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ☆
d1-06 Switchover frequency 2
d1-03~ maximum output
frequency
10.00 Hz ☆
d1-07
Speed loop integral
property
0: Integral separation disabled
1: Integral separation enabled
0 ☆
d1-08 ASR input filtering time 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ☆
d1-09
ASR output filtering
time
0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ☆
d1-10
Excitation current loop
proportional gain
0~30000 2000 ☆
d1-11
Excitation current loop
integral gain
0~30000 1300 ☆
d1-12
Torque current loop
proportional gain
0~30000 2000 ☆
d1-13
Torque current loop
integral gain
0~30000 1300 ☆
d1-14
Motor running torque
upper limit source in
speed control mode
0: d1-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d1-15
Braking torque upper
limit source in speed
control mode
0: d1-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d1-16
Digital setting of motor
running torque limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ☆
d1-17
Digital setting of
braking torque limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
171
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
d1-18 Motor running slip gain 50%~200% 100% ☆
d1-19 Braking slip gain 50%~200% 100% ☆
d1-20
Torque limit coefficient
in field weakening area
0.0%~100.0% 40.0% ☆
d1-21
PM field weakening
mode of synchronous
motor
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Automatic adjustment
1 ☆
d1-22
PM field weakening
depth of synchronous
motor
50%~500% 100% ☆
d1-23
Maximum current of
PM field weakening
1%~300% 50% ☆
d1-24
PM Field weakening
automatic adjustment
gain
0.10~5.00 1.00 ☆
d1-25
PM Field weakening
integral multiple
2~10 2 ☆
d1-26
Torque setting source in
torque control
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the
digital setting of d1-27.
0 ★
d1-27
Torque digital setting in
torque control
-200.0%~200.0% 100.0% ☆
d1-28
Forward speed limit in
torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d1-29
Reverse speed limit in
torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d1-30
Forward maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz ☆
d1-31
Reverse maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
172
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
d1-32
Acceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s ☆
d1-33
Deceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s ☆
Group d2: V/F Control Parameters
d2-00 V/F curve setting
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2-power V/F
4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation
0 ★
d2-01 Torque boost
0.0% ( torque auto-boost)
0.1%~30.0%
0 ☆
d2-02
Cut-off frequency of
torque boost
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated
frequency*(d2-02)
50.0% ★
d2-03
Multi-point V/F
frequency 1 (F1)
0.00 Hz ~ d2-05 0.00 Hz ☆
d2-04
Multi-point V/F voltage
1 (V1)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d2-05
Multi-point V/F
frequency 2 (F2)
d2-03 to d2-07 0.00 Hz ☆
d2-06
Multi-point V/F voltage
2 (V2)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d2-07
Multi-point V/F
frequency 3 (F3)
d2-05 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz ☆
d2-08
Multi-point V/F voltage
3 (V3)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d2-09
V/F slip compensation
coefficient
0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ☆
d2-10
V/F oscillation
suppression gain
0~100 0 ☆
d2-12
Voltage source for V/F
separation
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication setting
(Note: 100.0% corresponds to the rated
motor voltage)
0 ☆
d2-13 Volt age digital setting 0 V ~ rated motor voltage 0 V ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
173
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
for V/F separation
d2-14
Voltage rise time of V/F
separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the voltage
rising from 0 V ~ rated motor voltage.
0.0s ☆
Group d3: Motor 2 Parameters
d3-00 Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Model
dependent
★
d3-01 Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Model
dependent
★
d3-02 Rated motor current
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
≤55 kW)
0.1A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-03 Rated motor frequenc y 0.01 Hz~ maximum frequenc y 50.00Hz ★
d3-04
Rated motor rotational
speed
1rpm~65535rpm
Model
dependent
★
d3-05
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-06
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-07
Leakage inductive
reactance (asynchronous
motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-08
Mutual inductive
reactance (asynchronous
motor)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-09
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
0.01 A ~ d3-02 (Frequency inverter pow er ≤
55 kW)
0.1 A ~ d3-02 (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-15
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter
power ≥75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-16
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
power ≥ 75 kW)
Model
dependent
★
d3-17
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter
power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
Model
dependent
★
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
174
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
power ≥75 kW)
d3-18
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
0.1V~6553.5 V
Model
dependent
★
d3-19
Encoder pulses per
revolution
1~32767 1024 ★
d3-20 Encoder type
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver
2: UVW incremental encoder
3: Reversed
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
0 ★
d3-21
A, B phase sequence of
ABZ incremental
encoder
0: Forward
1: Reserve
0 ★
d3-22
Encoder installation
angle
0.0°~ 359.9° 0.0° ★
d3-23
U, V, W phase sequence
of UVW encoder
0: Forward
1: Reverse
0 ★
d3-24
UVW encoder angle
offset
0.0°~ 359.9° 0.0° ★
d3-28
Number of pole pairs of
resolver
1~99 1 ★
d3-29
Encoder wire-break
fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s
0.0s ★
d3-30
Motor 2 auto-tuning
selection
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete
auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load
auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
0 ★
Group d4: Motor 2 Vector Control Parameters
d4-00
Speed/Torque control
selection
0: Speed control
1: Torque control mode
0 ★
d4-01
Speed loop proportional
gain 1(Kp1)
0.01~10.00 0.30 ☆
d4-02
Speed loop integral time
1(Ti1)
0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ☆
d4-03 Switchover frequency 1 0.00Hz ~ d4-06 5.00 Hz ☆
d4-04
Speed loop proportional
gain 2(Kp2)
0.01~10.00 0.20 ☆
d4-05
Speed loop integral time
2(Ti2)
0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ☆
d4-06 Switchover frequency 2 d4-03 ~ maximum output frequency 10.00 Hz ☆
d4-07
Speed loop integral
property
0: Integral separated disabled
1: Integral separated enabled
0 ☆
d4-08 ASR input filtering time 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ☆
d4-09 ASR output filtering 0.000s~0.100s 0.000s ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
175
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
time
d4-10
Excitation current loop
proportional gain
0~30000 2000 ☆
d4-11
Excitation current loop
integral gain
0~30000 1300 ☆
d4-12
Torque current loop
proportional gain
0~30000 2000 ☆
d4-13
Torque current loop
integral gain
0~30000 1300 ☆
d4-14
Motor-driven torque
upper limit source in
speed control mode
0: d4-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5:Communication setting
0 ☆
d4-15
Braking torque upper
limit source in speed
control mode
0: d4-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d4-16
Digital setting of
motor-driven torque
limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ☆
d4-17
Digital setting of
braking torque limit
0.0%~200.0% 150.0% ☆
d4-18 Motor-driven slip gain 50%~200% 100% ☆
d4-19 Braking slip gain 50%~200% 100% ☆
d4-20
Torque limit coefficient
in field weakening area
0.0%~100.0% 40.0% ☆
d4-21
PM Field weakening
mode of synchronous
motor
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Adjustment
1 ☆
d4-22
PM Field weakening
degree of synchronous
motor
50%~500% 100% ☆
d4-23
Maximum PM field
weakening current
1%~300% 50% ☆
d4-24
PM Field weakening
automatic adjustment
gain
0.10~5.00 1.00 ☆
d4-25
PM Field weakening
integral gain
2~10 2 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
176
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
d4-26
Torque setting source in
torque control
0: Digital setting (d4-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the
digital setting of d4-27.
0 ★
d4-27
Torque digital setting in
torque control
-200.0%~200.0% 100.0% ☆
d4-28
Forward speed limit in
torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d4-29
Reverse speed limit in
torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
0 ☆
d4-30
Forward maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz ☆
d4-31
Reverse maximum
frequency in torque
control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz ☆
d4-32
Acceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s ☆
d4-33
Deceleration time in
torque control
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s ☆
Group d5: Motor 2 V/F control parameters
d5-00 V/F curve setting
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2-power V/F
4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation
0 ★
d5-01 Torque boost
0.0% (Automatic torque boost)
0.1%~30.0%
0 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
177
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
d5-02
Cut-off frequency of
torque boost
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated
frequency*d5-02
50.0% ★
d5-03
Multi-point V/F
frequency 1 (F1)
0.00 Hz ~ d5-05 0.00 Hz ☆
d5-04
Multi-point V/F voltage
1 (V1)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d5-05
Multi-point V/F
frequency 2 (F2)
d5-03 ~ d5-07 0.00 Hz ☆
d5-06
Multi-point V/F voltage
2 (V2)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d5-07
Multi-point V/F
frequency 3 (F3)
d5-05 ~ Maximum frequency(b0-13) 0.00 Hz ☆
d5-08
Multi-point V/F voltage
3 (V3)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% ☆
d5-09
V/F slip compensation
coefficient
0.0%~200.0% 0.0% ☆
d5-10
oscillation suppression
gain
0~100 0 ☆
d5-12
Voltage source for V/F
separation
0: Digital setting(d5-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication setting Note :100.0%
corresponds to the rated motor voltage
0 ☆
d5-13
Voltage digital setting
for V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage 0 V ☆
d5-14
Voltage rise time of V/F
separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the voltage
rising from 0 V ~ rated motor voltage.
0.0s ☆
Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters
d6-00
Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~15.0 kHz
Model
dependent
☆
d6-01 DPWM switch over
frequency upper limit
0.00Hz~15.00 Hz 12.00 Hz ★
d6-02
PWM modulation mode
0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
0 ★
d6-03 Carrier frequency
adjustment with
temperature
0: No
1: Yes
1 ☆
d6-04
Random PWM depth
0: Random PWM invalid
1~10: Random PWM carrier frequency
depth
0 ☆
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
178
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
d6-05 Dead zone
compensation mode
selection
0: No compensation
1: Compensation mode 1
2: Compensation mode 2
1 ☆
d6-06
SVC mode selection
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
1 ★
d6-07 Flux braking gain 0~150% 100% ☆
d6-08 Flux compensation gain 0~200% (Default value is 100%) 100% ☆
d6-09 Flux compensation
cut-off frequency
0.00Hz~50.00Hz 20.00Hz ☆
d6-10 Excitation curre nt loop
KP
0~500 100 ☆
d6-11 Torque current loop KP 0~500 0 ☆
d6-12 Torque current filtering
time coefficient
0~31 28 ☆
d6-13 No load current boo st 0.0%~50.0% 10.0% ☆
d6-14 Cut-off frequency for no
load current boost
0.00Hz~20.00Hz 15.00Hz ☆
d6-15
Field weakening gain 50%~150% 100% ☆
Group U0: Standard Monitoring Parameters
U0-00 Running frequency 0.00~300.00 Hz (b0-11 = 2) - ●
U0-01 Setting frequency 0.00~3000.0 Hz (b0-11 = 1) - ●
U0-02 DC Bus voltage 0.0~3000.0 V - ●
U0-03 Output voltage 0V~1140 V - ●
U0-04 Output current
0.00A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
≤ 55 kW)
0.0A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter
power > 55 kW)
- ●
U0-05 Output power 0~32767 - ●
U0-06 Output torque -200.0%~200.0% - ●
U0-07 DI state -0~32767 - ●
U0-08 DO state 0~1023 - ●
U0-09 AI1 v oltage - - ●
U0-10 AI2 v oltage - - ●
U0-11 AI3 v oltage - - ●
U0-12 Count value - - ●
U0-13 Length value - - ●
U0-14 Load speed display 0~65535 - ●
U0-15 PID setting
0~65535
- ●
U0-16 PID feedback
0~65535
- ●
U0-17 PLC stage - - ●
U0-18 Input pulse frequency 0.00kHz ~100.00 kHz - ●
U0-19
Feedback speed,
unit:0.01Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
- ●
U0-20 Remaining running time 0.0min~6500.0 min - ●
U0-21
AI1 voltage before
correction
0.00V~10.57 V
- ●
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
179
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
U0-22
AI2 voltage before
correction
0.00V~10.57 V
- ●
U0-23
AI3 voltage before
correction
-10.57V~10.57 V
- ●
U0-24 Linear speed 0.0min~65535m/min - ●
U0-25 Present power-on time - - ●
U0-26 Present running time - - ●
U0-27
Communication setting
value
-100.00%~100.00% - ●
U0-28 Encoder feedback speed
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
- ●
U0-29 Main frequency X
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
- ●
U0-30 Auxiliary frequency Y
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
- ●
U0-31
Viewing any register
address value
0°C~200°C - ●
U0-32
Synchronous motor
rotor position
0.0°~ 359.9° - ●
U0-33 Motor te mperature 0°C~200°C - ●
U0-34 Target torque -200.0%~2 00.0% - ●
U0-35 Resolver position 0~4095 - ●
U0-36 Power factor angle - - ●
U0-37 ABZ position 0~6 5535 - ●
U0-38
Target voltage of V/F
separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
- ●
U0-39
Output voltage of V/F
separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
- ●
U0-40
DI input state visual
display
- - ●
U0-41
DO output state visual
display
- - ●
U0-42
DI function state visual
display 1
- - ●
U0-43
DO function state visual
display
- - ●
U0-44 Fault information - - ●
U0-45 Phase Z signal counting - - ●
U0-46
Present setting
frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
- ●
U0-47
Present running
frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
- ●
U0-48
Frequency inverter
running state
0~65535
- ●
U0-49
Sent value of
point-point
communication
-100.00%~100.00%
- ●
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
180
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
U0-50
Received value of
point-point
communication
-100.00%~100.00%
- ●
Group A0: System Parameters
A0-00 User password 0~65535 0 ☆
A0-01 Product number
Frequency inverter product number
Model
dependent
●
A0-02 Software version
Software version of control board
Model
dependent
●
A0-03 Rated current -
Model
dependent
●
A0-04 Rated voltage -
Model
dependent
●
A0-07
Parameter modification
property
0: Modifiable
1: Not modifiable
0 ☆
A0-08
Individualized
parameter display
property
Unit's digit: User-defined p arameter QUICK
display selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
Ten's digit: User-changed parameter QUICK
display selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
0 ☆
A0-09 R estore default settings
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings ex cept motor
parameters and accumulation record.
2: Restore default settings for all parameters
3: Reserve
4: Clear records
Other: Reserve
0 ★
Group A1: User-defined Parameters
A1-00
User-defined function
code 0
User visible function codes ub0.01 ☆
A1-01
User-defined function
code 1
User visible function codes ub0.02 ☆
A1-02
User-defined function
code 2
User visible function codes ub0.03 ☆
A1-03
User-defined function
code 3
User visible function codes ub0.07 ☆
A1-04
User-defined function
code 4
User visible function codes ub0.12 ☆
A1-05
User-defined function
code 5
User visible function codes ub0.21 ☆
A1-06
User-defined function
code 6
User visible function codes ub0.22 ☆
A1-07
User-defined function
code 7
User visible function codes ub3.00 ☆
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
181
Code Pa rameter Name Setting range Default Property
A1-08
User-defined function
code 8
User visible function codes ub3.01 ☆
A1-09
User-defined function
code 9
User visible function codes ub3.02 ☆
A1-10
User-defined function
code 10
User visible function codes ub4.04 ☆
A1-11
User-defined function
code 11
User visible function codes ub6.01 ☆
A1-12
User-defined function
code 12
User visible function codes ub1.00 ☆
A1-13
User-defined function
code 13
User visible function codes ub1.10 ☆
A1-14
User-defined function
code 14
User visible function codes ud2.00 ☆
A1-15
User-defined function
code 15
User visible function codes ud2.01 ☆
A1-16
User-defined function
code 16
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-17
User-defined function
code 17
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-18
User-defined function
code 18
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-19
User-defined function
code 19
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-20
User-defined function
code 20
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-21
User-defined function
code 21
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-22
User-defined function
code 22
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-23
User-defined function
code 23
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-24
User-defined function
code 24
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-25
User-defined function
code 25
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-26
User-defined function
code 26
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-27
User-defined function
code 27
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-28
User-defined function
code 28
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
A1-29
User-defined function
code 29
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-30
User-defined function
code 30
User visible function codes uA0.00 ☆
A1-31
User-defined function
code 31
User visible function codes
uA0.00
☆
Warranty Agreement
1) The warranty period of the product is 12 months (refer to the barcode of nameplate). During the
warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the
instructions, EMHEATER will be responsible for free maintenance.
2) Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following
reasons:
A. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission;
B. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster;
C. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement;
D. Improper operation;
E. Trouble out of the frequency inverter (for example, external device).
3) If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card in
detail.
4) The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of EMHEATER.
5) The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance
personnel when asking for maintenance.
6) If there is any problem during the service, contact EMHEATER’s agent or EMHEATER directly.
7) This agreement shall be interpreted by China EM Technology Limited.
Customer
Information
Company address:
Company Name: Contact Person:
Post Code: Tel:
Product
information
Product model:
Body barcode (Attach here):
Name of agent:
Failure
information
(Maintenance time and content):
Maintenance personnel:
Product Warranty Card
Loading...